Service Manual - DKS Generation 3

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - General Contents

General Contents

Chapter 1 - Environment, Safety & Installation Conditions

Chapter 2 - Operating Requirements & Principles
Chapter 3 - Installation Instructions
Chapter 4 - Preventive Maintenance
Chapter 5 - Repairing & Adjusting
Chapter 6 - Settings
Chapter 7 - Electrical Diagrams
Chapter 8 - Software Installation Procedure

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - General Contents

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 General Contents - p. 

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - General Contents Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - General Contents

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

General Contents - p.  060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Environment & Safety

Chapter 1 - Environment, Safety &

Installation Conditions

1. Environment & Safety 3

1.1. Warning 3
1.2. Electrical Hazard 3
1.3. Safety Devices 3

2. Installation Conditions 4
2.1. Main Power Supply 4
2.2. Location 4
2.3. Water Supply 5
2.4. Floor Conditions 5
2.5. Surface Area 6

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Environment & Safety

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 1 - p. 

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Environment & Safety Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Environment & Safety

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 1 - p.  060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Environment & Safety

1. Environment & Safety

1.1. Warning

Only technicians from the maintenance company approved by the manufacturer or a manufactur-
er's representative are authorized to install the machine, perform the initial start up and mainte-
nance.

1.2. Electrical Hazard

This symbol appears on the product in all areas presenting risks of electrical shock.
Only maintenance professionals may work in these areas.

For safety purposes, the owner of the machine or the technician must not
intervene while the machine is powered on, or in the 208 to 230 V range zone.

Only authorized Dell Service Personnel are allowed to open / dismantle the computer which af-
fects the PC warranty!

1.3. Safety Devices

The green general switch (On/Off) is on the left side of the machine. In order to access the
switch when equipped with the second paper feeder option, the position of the machine
will have to provide easy access to the ON/OFF general switch or to the mains socket to which
the machine is connected.

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Environment & Safety

F1 = 10A 600V ref: N991 904 314, protects the CE22 socket-outlets, above the electrical enclo-
sure, where the computer, the screen and the scanner are connected.
F2 = 15A 600V ref: N991 904 405, protects the 230V supply of the machine (IWAKI pumps, circu-
lation pumps, heating resistances, drying resistance, exposure deck turbine, dryer unit turbine).
F3 = 10A 600V ref: N991 904 314, protects the two low voltage power supplies of the machine:
computer supply and 24V supply.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 1 - p. 

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Environment & Safety

2. Installation Conditions

The machine is intended for indoor use only.

2.1. Main Power Supply

The machine should be installed near a main single-phase 2P + earth electrical outlet which should
remain accessible after the installation. The power outlet must have a rated voltage of 230V ( + 10%
, -15% ).
This main electrical outlet must be earth grounded to ensure proper operation and personal safety
to conform with current standards. Ensure sufficient surrounding space to allow the front door to
be opened. If the main electrical outlet socket cannot be accessed, include an isolating switch that
can be accessed quickly and easily. The isolating switch should be:
- 208V / 15A.
- 230V / 16A.
This minilab has been designed for connection to a network with earthed neutral.
CE only : Provide a 30 mA residual current protection upstream of the main electrical outlet socket
to which the minilab will be connected.

2.2. Location

he machine should be placed on a dry, hard, stable, flat floor. Water must not run or stagnate un-
T
der the minilab during cleaning of the premises. Avoid excessively humid areas.

he machine is not fixed to the floor. It should only be moved on an exceptional basis and only
T
after being placed on its pallet, particularly if obstacles, such as pavements or steps, are to be over-
come.

he ambient temperature in the premises should be between +15 °C and +30 °C and should not
T
fall below 13°C when the machine is switched off. Relative humidity should be between 30 and
70 % (without condensation). Do not put the machine in areas exposed to direct sunlight (in front
of a window) or near heaters. Never place the machine near steam or oily vapours. The premises
should be properly ventilated (motorized ventilation system - minimim flow = 10 air changes/hour)
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Environment & Safety

and the atmosphere cleaned with air filtration.

he machine should not hinder traffic routes or public exits. Avoid areas close to stairs, escalators
T
or lifts. The area required for machine operation is its floor surface area plus the area required for
access to the external doors and to the machine itself.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 1 - p.  060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Environment & Safety

2.3. Water Supply

he machine operation requires the use of a sink for rack rinsing. A sink of approximately 60 cm x
T
40 cm, 30 cm deep is sufficient. For chemical preparation, the water should be of sufficient quality
(< 20° TH) and at a temperature between 20°C and 35°C. If the water is too hard, the quality of
the chemical processing may be affected, in which case a water softener should be used.

2.4. Floor Conditions

• The floor should have strength which the usual vibration, such as a person walking or
opening/closing a door, will not affect the machine.

• As a guide, strength is the extent to which a standing person on the floor does not feel a
vibration when a 20 litres plastic tank containing 10 litres of water is falling near the
person.

• If this condition is satisfied, the floor made of concrete or linoleum on which a thin carpet
or plastic tiles are spread is okay.

• The floor is even and no vibration is given to the machine.Vibration should be 3m/s²
(0,3g) or less in each direction on the installation place.

• The floor must support up to 800 kg for the machine equipped with all options and full of chem-
istry.

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Environment & Safety

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 1 - p. 

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Environment & Safety

2.5. Surface Area

Respect the free space around the machine to enable use in the best possible conditions.

1inch = 25,4 mm
1950 mm (76.8 inches)
1392 mm (54.3 inches)

(29.5 inches)
(27.5 inches)
(20.4 inches)

755mm
705mm
519 mm

1 inch = 2.54 cm
10 cm
4 inches

61 cm
24 inches
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Environment & Safety

61 cm
24 inches
81 cm
32 inches

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 1 - p.  060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

Chapter 2 - Operating Requirements

& Principles

1. Presentation of the Machine����������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 3

1.1 General description������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 3
1.2 Size and weight���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 3
1.3. Electrical characteristics����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 4
1.4. Other characteristics���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 4
1.5. Input peripherals������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 5
1.6. Output peripherals�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 6
1.7. Printer������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 6
1.8. Productivity��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 7
1.9. Chemical characteristics����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 8
1.10. Paper characteristics������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 11

2. Operating Principles������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 13
2.1. Paper Light Protection and Paper Feeding������������������������������������������������������������������� 13
2.2. Paper Cutting���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 14
2.3. Paper Buffer������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 15
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles
2.4. Paper Exposure������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 17
2.5. Paper Back Printing������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 19
2.6. Paper Development����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 20
2.7. Paper Drying����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 21
2.8. Paper Measurement (Densitometer)���������������������������������������������������������������������������� 22
2.9. Paper Sorting���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 23
2.10. Paper Complete Path������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 24

3. Chemical Processor������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 25

4. Electronic Communication������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 27

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 2 - p. 

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 2 - p.  060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

1. Presentation of the Machine

1.1 General description

17 LCD or CRT Touch screen

PC (rear side) Keyboard (optional)

Film scanner
Exposure head Dryer + Stacker
section

Accessories storage
(optional)
Back printer module
Waste chemical tank
External paper (rear side)
cartridge & feeder
(optional) Chemical tank
access door
Exposure deck
Internal paper
cartridge & Water and waste tank
feeder access door

1.2 Size and weight

• On pallet size: 1.64m X 1.02m X 1.46m. (Lenght X Width X Height).

• On pallet weight: 500 kg.
• Floor surface area:
Standard printer: 0,99m²
1.40 X 0.70 X 1.15 (Lenght X Width X Height)
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles
With second paper feeder: 1,25m²
1.95 X 0.70 X 1.15 (Lenght X Width X Height)
1inch = 25,4 mm
1950 mm (76.8 inches)
1392 mm (54.3 inches)
(27.5 inches)
705mm

755mm
(29.5 inches)
519 mm
(20.4 inches)

• Net weight: 450 kg.

• Working state weight: up to 800 kg (with all options and full of chemistry).

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 2 - p. 

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

1.3. Electrical characteristics

Power supply: 230 + 208 V / 50-60 Hz - 16 A.

• Electric consumption:
- Standby mode: 300 W under 230 V
- Dryer in standby and baths pre-heating: 1500 W under 230 V
- Dryer in standby and baths are regulating: 900 W max and 750 W average under 230 V
- Dryer pre-heating and baths are regulating: 2900 W max under 230 V or 2600 W average
- Drying big sizes and baths are regulating: 2900 W max under 230 V or 2000 W average
- Drying small sizes and baths are regulating: 2900 W max under 230 V or 1600 W average

• Protection: residual current protection device on 230 V mains unit.

• Cartridge fuse-holders: 10 A, 15 A and 10 A.
• Compliant with CE / cTUVus / FCC standards.
• Compliant with the RoHs European Directive.

1.4. Other characteristics

Noise level:
• Standby mode: 57 dB (A)
• Operating mode: 72 dB (A)

Caloric emission BTU:

• Standby mode: to be determinated
• operating mode: to be determinated

Paint RAL:
• Light grey: 7035
• Dark grey: 7021

Computer:

• PC: processor Pentium 4 > 3GHz Hyper threading, > 80 GB HD, 2048Mo
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

• Network and modem card (remote-maintenance using «PC Anywhere» Modem 56K and LAN).

Exposure unit:

• MSB HD Apochromatique 1080x1920.

• x9 and x16 Piezo system.

Operator screen:

• 17» LCD SCREEN (Non touch)

• Optional 17» CTR with touch screen

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 2 - p.  060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

1.5. Input peripherals

• Film Scanner (Option)

• FILM 135 colour negative, positive and black & white:

• Films 12, 24, 36 exposures,
• Single frame films
• Mounted slides (optional)
Scanning Resolution
Prescanning 492 x 328 (350 dpi)
High Resolution 1968 x 1312 (1400 dpi)
Ultra Resolution 3936 x 2624 (2800 dpi)

• APS FILM:
• Film 15, 25, 40 exposures.
• Possibility to use films with or without cartridge.
Scanning Resolution
Prescanning 402 x 226 (350 dpi)
High Resolution 1608 x 904 (1400 dpi)
Ultra Resolution 3216 x 1808 (2800 dpi)

• 120 FILM (Option):

Scanning Resolution
Prescanning 750 x 747 (350 dpi)
High Resolution 3000 x 2988 (1400 dpi)
Ultra Resolution 6000 x 5976 (2800 dpi)

• Slides (Option):
Scanning Resolution
Prescanning 492 x 328 (350 dpi)
High Resolution 1968 x 1312 (1400 dpi)
Ultra Resolution 3936 x 2624 (2800 dpi)
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles
• Flat-bed scanner A4 (Option)
• Maximum format 21 x 29,7 (A4), with scanner A4

• CD DVD Rom burner drive

• 8 in 1 Hi Speed USB 2.0 reader, which accept following cards:

• Compact Flash Type
• Compact Flash Type II
• Memory Stick
• Memory Stick PRO
• SmartMedia
• xD Picture Card
• SD
• MultiMediaCard

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 2 - p. 

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

• Digital sources:

Using digital sources, the Minilab recognizes almost all standard image formats
including:

ATT, BMP, BRK, CAL, CLP, CIF, CUT, DCX, DCM, DIB, FPX, G3, G4, GEM, GIF, GX2, ICA, ICO, IFF, IGF, IMT, JPG, progres-
sive JPEG, JIF, JFIF, KFX, LV, MAC, MSP, MOD, NCR, PBM, PCD, PCT, PCX, PGM, PNG, PNM, PPM, PSD, RAS, SGI,TGA,
uncompressed TIF, WPG, XBM, WMF, XPM, XRX, XWD, RAW (NEF, CRW, CR2).

1.6. Output peripherals

• USB drive

• CD DVD Rom burner

• Digital image using output peripherals:

- BMP Format: uncompressed files with no loss
- JPG Format: compressed files.
- TIFF Format: compressed files with no loss

• Thumbnail: the image from the scanner is saved with a 600x400 pixels size. An
image from any other input than the scanner is proportionally adjusted to a 400 pixels
width.
• Reduced: the image from the scanner is saved with a 1200x800 pixels size. An image
from any other input than the scanner is proportionally adjusted to a 800 pixels width.
• Normal: the image from the scanner is saved with dimensions of 3072x2048 pixels.
• Images from any other input than the scanner is not adjusted.

1.7. Printer
Printing paper format: on matt, glossy or luster paper from:
• 8’’ x 12’’ (20x30cm) DKS 16X0
• 12’’ x 18’’ (30x45cm) DKS 17X0
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

Image size Resolution (DPI) piezo lens 16X0 17X0

89 x 127 (3.5" x 5") 350 x9 1 x x
102 x 152 (4" x 6") 350 x9 1 x x
114 x 152 (4.5" x 6") 350 x9 1 x x
127 x 178 (5" x 7") 350 x9 1 x x
152 x 210 (6" x 8.25") 350 x9 1 x x
178 x 240 (7" x 9.5") 350 x9 1 x x
203 x 300 (8" x 12") 350 x9 1 x x
240 x 300 (9.5" x 12") 350 x 16 2 - x
254x 300 (10" x 12") 350 x 16 2 - x
305X 450 (12" X 18") 350 x 16 2 - x

• Index
• 4 or 6 ID pictures

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 2 - p.  060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

1.8. Productivity

Required conditions:

- Minilab compliant with technical specifications

- SP20 EM Rapid chemicals ( Single Part 20 seconds Easy Management)
- Kodak Edge paper
- 2 backside printing lines
- Printing of the same picture:

Formats Internal External DKS DKS DKS DKS DKS

Feeder Feeder 1610 1670 1710 1750 1770
Cartridge Width x Length Prints/ Prints/
hour hour
Double track 152x102 FULL PAPER 2000 - 1000 2000 1000 1500 2000
Double track 152x114 FULL PAPER 1800 - - - - - -
Double track 152x210 FULL PAPER 1000 - - - - - -
Double track 89x127 FULL PAPER 1080 - - - - - -
Double track 102x127 FULL PAPER 1100 - - - - - -
Double track 102x152 FULL PAPER 1000 900 - - - - -
Double track 127x102 FULL PAPER 2000 - - - - - -
Double track 127x178 FULL PAPER 1050 - - - - - -
Simple track 178x127 FULL PAPER - 460

Simple track 178x240 FULL PAPER - 420

Simple track 203x305 FULL PAPER - 400 400
Simple track 210x152 FULL PAPER - 460
Simple track 240x178 FULL PAPER - 450
Simple track 240x360 FULL PAPER - 300
Simple track 254x381 FULL PAPER - 290
Simple track 305x203 FULL PAPER - 440 450
Simple track 305x400 FULL PAPER - 280
Simple track 305x457 FULL PAPER - 250 250

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

Productivities are measured on the base of 6 M +/- 5% pixels files (2000x3000).

• Processing capacity:
- 135 format film with 24 pictures scanned at medium resolution
- Hourly output: 40 orders with inactive ADDR index.

• Sorter: the various orders are separated as the belt advances. The storage capacity is of
10 orders or 250 prints on each plate.

The performance levels are theoretical and may vary significantly depending on ma-
chine parameters (paper sensitivity, chemistry process, …).

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 2 - p. 

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

1.9. Chemical characteristics

• 20 seconds KIS chemistry : Name: SP20 EM (LR)

File: ChimieSP20EM_LR.ini

Chimie.exe table:
Type of Bottle Capacities Capacities Concen- Water Replenishment
bath Volume per per bottle trate ratio Rate (ml)
(L) bottle(m²) (prints 10x15) ratio
Developer 2.4 222 14333 0.1 0.9 108
Bleach/fix 2.4 56 3583 0.4 0.6 108
Stabilizer 2.4 344 22165 0.018 0.982 388

Cycle time: 20 S for developer and bleach bath, rack motor speed frequency 180Hz.

Type of bath Temperature Rate

Developer 40°C +/- 0,2 108 ml/m²
Bleach- fix 38°C +/- 2 108 ml/m²
Stabilizer 37°C +/- 2 388 ml/m²

• 20 seconds Europe Kodak chemistry: Name: Kodak Ektakolor Prime SP Lorr chemistry
File: Chimiekodak_EU_20sDKS3.ini

Chimie.exe table:
Type of Bottle Capacities Capacities Concen- Water Replenishment
bath Volume per per bottle trate ratio Rate (ml)
(L) bottle(m²) (prints 10x15) ratio
Developer 1.3 85 5467 0.142 0.858 108
Bleach/fix 2.5 63 4031 0.5 0.5 80
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

Stabilizer 2.4 344 22165 0.018 0.982 388

Cycle time: 20 S for developer and bleach bath, rack motor speed frequency 180Hz.

Type of bath Temperature Rate

Developer 40°C +/- 0,2 108 ml/m²
Bleach- fix 38°C +/- 2 80 ml/m²
Stabilizer 37°C +/- 2 388 ml/m²

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 2 - p.  060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

• 30 seconds Europe Kodak chemistry: Name: Kodak Ektakolor Prime SP Lorr chemistry
File: ChimieKodak_EU_30sDKS3.ini

Chimie.exe table:
Type of Bottle Capacities Capacities Concen- Water Replenishment
bath Volume per per bottle trate ratio Rate (ml)
(L) bottle(m²) (prints 10x15) ratio
Developer 1.3 93 5972 0.13 0.87 108
Bleach/fix 2.5 83 5375 0.5 0.5 60
Stabilizer 2.4 344 22165 0.018 0.982 388

Cycle time: 30 S for developer and bleach bath, rack motor speed frequency 120Hz.

Type of bath Temperature Rate

Developer 40°C +/- 0,2 108 ml/m²
Bleach- fix 38°C +/- 2 60 ml/m²
Stabilizer 37°C +/- 2 388 ml/m²

• 45 seconds Europe Kodak chemistry: Name: Kodak Ektakolor Prime SP Lorr chemistry
File: ChimieKodak_EU_45sDKS3.ini

Chimie.exe table:
Type of Bottle Capacities Capacities Concen- Water Replenishment
bath Volume per per bottle trate ratio Rate (ml)
(L) bottle(m²) (prints 10x15) ratio
Developer 1.3 125 8062 0.13 0.87 80
Bleach/fix 2.5 91 5864 0.5 0.5 55
Stabilizer 2.4 344 22165 0.018 0.982 388
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles
Cycle time: 20 S for developer and bleach bath, rack motor speed frequency 80Hz.

Type of bath Temperature Rate

Developer 37.8°C +/- 0,2 80 ml/m²
Bleach- fix 35°C +/- 2 55 ml/m²
Stabilizer 35°C +/- 2 388 ml/m²

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 2 - p. 

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

• 45 seconds USA Kodak chemistry: Name: Kodak Ektakolor Prime SP Lorr chemistry
File: ChimieKodak_US_45sDKS3.ini

Chimie.exe table:
Type of Bottle Capacities Capacities Concen- Water Replenishment
bath Volume per per bottle trate ratio Rate (ml)
(L) bottle(m²) (prints 10x15) ratio
Developer 1.3 125 8062 0.13 0.87 80
Bleach/fix 2.5 91 5864 0.5 0.5 55
Stabilizer 0.426 122 7868 0.009 0.991 388

Cycle time: 20 S for developer and bleach bath, rack motor speed frequency 80Hz.

Type of bath Temperature Rate

Developer 37.8°C +/- 0,2 80 ml/m²
Bleach- fix 35°C +/- 2 55 ml/m²
Stabilizer 35°C +/- 2 388 ml/m²

• Tanks capacity:

Capacity in liters
Processor Developer 10 L
Processor Bleach/fix 10 L
Processor Stabilizer (3) App. 11 L each

Replenishment water tank 20 L

Wasted Developer 4.2 L

Wasted Bleach/fix 2.7 L
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

Wasted stabilizer 11 L

• Colour codes:

Products KIS Kodak

Developer Yellow Blue
Bleach / fix. Green Red
Stabilizer Blue Yellow

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 2 - p. 10 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

1.10. Paper characteristics

• RA4 compatible paper

• Type mat, glossy or luster

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 2 - p. 11

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 2 - p. 12 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

2. Operating Principles
2.1. Paper Light Protection and Paper Feeding

The paper will be stored in cartridges delivered with the

machine.

The cartridge (located in the red dotted frame on the op-

posite picture):
• protects the paper from the day-light;
• feeds the necessary length of paper;
• detects the presence of paper;
• detects the transition between two different bands of
paper (thanks to transition holes).

There are two types of cartridges (Single track cartridges and double track cartirdges), and they
may contain different paper sizes.

2.1.1. Single track cartridges

Cartridge without paper Cartridge with paper

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

2.1.2. Double track cartridges

Cartridge without paper Cartridge with paper

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 2 - p. 13

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

2.2. Paper Cutting

The paper cutter (located in the red dotted frame on the

opposite picture) will pull out the right length of paper from
the cartridge before cutting it.
The paper is then sent onto the next step.
This cycle can be carried out on only one track (left or
right), or on both tracks simustaneously.
A special mechanism also rewinds the paper in the cartridge
so that we do not waste any paper when changing the car-
tridge.

Inside view of the cutter Cutter viewed from the other side
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

Cutter with double paper track Cutter with single paper track

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 2 - p. 14 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

2.3. Paper Buffer

The machine can expose up to four (small) pictures at the

same time. 9*13, 10*15 and 11*14 pictures can be exposed
four by four.
Over 11*14, pictures are exposed two by two or one by
one only.
Since the paper cutter can cut only two pictures at the
same time, we have to prepare a set of four pictures and
store it in the buffer (located in the red dotted frame on the
opposite picture) before sending the set onto the exposure
plan.
The buffer cycle is described below in four steps.

2.3.1. First step

The two first photos (in green) are
cut in the cutter from the paper
coming out of the cartridge while the
four previous photos (in blue) are
exposed on the exposure plan.

2.3.2. Second step

The two first photos (in green) are
placed in the buffer while the two
next ones (in green) are cut in the
cutter and the four previous ones
(in light blue), now exposed, are sent
to the back printer (see section '2.7.
Back Printer').

2.3.3. Third step

The two next photos are put in the
buffer with the two first ones. Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

Note: since the buffer is small and

depending on the size of the photos, the
photos can overlap.

2.3.4. Last step

The four photos (in green) are sent
to the exposure plan while the two
next ones (in orange) are cut in the
cutter from the cartridge's paper.

Green exposure cycle while completing the next one

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 2 - p. 15

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

2.3.5. Paper buffer view

Cutter
Exposure plan motor

Buffer Area

Buffer Motor
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 2 - p. 16 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

2.4. Paper Exposure

Before each order submitted for paper exposure (located in

the red dotted frame on the opposite picture) the light sen-
sor measures the quantity of light emitted by the RGB leds.

2.4.1. Principle

Photo

1. The image is sent on the LCD as a

negative image.
2. The LCD image is exposed on the
paper through the appropriate lens.
This operation is repeated for each
color (RGB).

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 2 - p. 17

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

2.4.2. Paper Exposure Advance

The paper to be exposed is waiting in the paper buffer (see previous paragraph).
When all the 3 cells (1, 2 and 3) are free (which means that no paper is present on the exposure
area), the paper can be sent onto the exposure area (see picture below).

Paper

The belt motor pulls the paper until it reaches cell number 1 (see picture below).

From this moment, the belt motor makes the necessary number of steps to center the paper on
the exposure area (see picture below).

The paper is then R G B exposed (see picture below and 'Paper Exposure' chapter) and follows
its process cycle (It is sent to the back printer, see next paragraph).
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

Cell number 2 (and 3 for external cutter) is used to actually measure the distance between pictu-
res when exposing 2 or 4 pictures at the same time.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 2 - p. 18 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

2.5. Paper Back Printing

Once the paper has been exposed, it is then sent to the

back printer (located in the red dotted frame on the oppo-
site picture) where some data about the photo is printed on
the side of the photo which has not been exposed.
When the paper is in the printer, cell 1 detects its pre-
sence, makes the photo advance step by step and launches
the printing. Cell 2 detects when the photo is sent to the
chemicals tank.

Cell 2

Paper Out

Cell 1

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

Paper In

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 2 - p. 19

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

2.6. Paper Development

The paper goes through five different baths in the tank

(located in the red dotted frame on the opposite picture)
to get developed.
The different baths are:

1. Developer (1 on the picture below);

2. Bleach / Fix (2 on the picture below);
3. Stabilizer 1 (3 on the picture below);
4. Stabilizer 2 (4 on the picture below);
5. Stabilizer 3 (5 on the picture below).

1 2 3 4 5
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 2 - p. 20 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

2.7. Paper Drying

Paper drying (located in the red dotted frame in the oppo-

site picture) is made thanks to big fan blowing on the paper
and an electric resistor heating up the air.
A temperature sensor regulates the temperature by driving
or not the heater.
A thermal fuse is used to switch off the heater in case of
overtemperature.

Electric resistor & thermal fuse (behind the fan) Electric resistor
Fan

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 2 - p. 21

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

2.8. Paper Measurement (Densitometer)

A lamp is used to send some light onto the picture.

By reflection, the light component not absorbed by the pic-
ture colour will be catched by the optical fibber.

This light will then go through 2 filters and 1 mirror in

order to separate the 3 components of the received light
(Red, Green and Blue).

Each colour will then be sent to an electronical device in

order to transform the light quantity into voltage, and then
voltage into numerical values.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

Light direc-
tion
Optical fiber
Lamp
(beneath the
grey plate)

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 2 - p. 22 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

2.9. Paper Sorting

Photos are sorted in piles. Each pile contains all the photos
of a given developement process. A "full sorter" cell is there
and stops the machine when the sorter is full.

Full sorter cell

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 2 - p. 23

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

2.10. Paper Complete Path

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

1. The paper comes out from the cartridge.

2. It gets cut in the paper feeder.
3. The paper waits in the paper buffer for being sent onto the exposure area.
4. The paper gets exposed on the exposure area.
5. It is then sent to the back-printer.
6. The paper is then developped in the chemical tanks.
7. The paper goes through the drying module.
8. The photos are sorted on the output bands.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 2 - p. 24 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

3. Chemical Processor

To properly work, the chemistry has to be used at a precise temperature.

To do so, we use an electric heater in each bath combined with some temperature sensors to
regulate the temperature. The PCB reads the chemical
T° thanks to the T° sensors.

If the chemistry T° is lower

than the setting, the PCB dri-
ves the heater.

When the T° reaches the

settings, the PCB stops the
heater.

When the T° goes down a

little bit, the PCB drives again
the heater.
In order to get an homogeneous temperature in the baths, we also use a circulation pump.
Note that this pump is also used to filter the chemistry to remove different particles as goudron,
souffer, argentic deposits, etc...

Note: The circulation pump

always works when the DKS
application is started on the PC if
no security switch is activated.

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

The chemistry is also done to work in a certain time, which means that the picture should remain
X seconds in each bath. The time adjustment on the machine is set by the motor racks speed.

The more the motor turns fast, the

more the racks are turning fast, and
the more the pictures advance fast.
By regulating the speed of the rack
motor we can adjust the picture
immersion time.

When processing paper, picture

after picture, the chemistry activity
decreases. It becomes less active.
This is true for each bath (develop-
per, Bleach Fix and Stab).

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 2 - p. 25

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

To compensate this, we add

some new fresh chemistry
proportionally on the pa-
per quantity processed. This
proportion is what we call the
“Replenishment rate”.
Depending on the paper pro-
cessed (and the replenishment
rate), the replenishment pump
sends some fresh chemistry
in the tank. In fact, it mixes
some concentrated chemistry
and some water to make the
right amount of replenishment
chemistry.

The pressure sensor informs the software when the replenishment tank is empty.
The same quantity of « old » chemistry is evacuated into the wasted tank.
The « Full » sensor informs the software when the wasted tank is full.

If for some reasons, the chemistry level goes down, different actions are carried out.
In case the top sensor does not touch the chemistry, the replenishment pump sends some fresh
chemistry in order to top up the level.
In case the bottom sensor does not touch the chemistry, the heating has to be switched off in
order not to burn anything.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

Each chemistry manufacturer strongly advises to use the chemistry with some specific characteris-
tics, and this for each bath.

For example, here are the settings for KIS SP20EM LR chemistry:

Time (Speed) in seconds T° in Celcius Replenishment rate Dilution ratio

Developper 20 39.7+-0.2 108 0.1
Bleach Fix 20 36 108 0.4
Stab X 3 20 X 3 35 388 0.018

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 2 - p. 26 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

4. Electronic Communication

Each component of the machine (sensor, switch, motor, etc) are connected to the sub-assembly
board (X,Y, Z etc).
This board has an integrated intelligence and knows how to handle the components to run the
desired action.
This intelligence is an embedded software (firmware) that is donwload from the PC. The PC also
uploads the specific parameters at each start up.
The board only needs an electrical power and the PC information (throught a CAN bus) to drive
the components.

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

In the example above, if the PC wants the paper cutter to cut one picture, it works as following:

1/ The PC sends a message to the cutter board through the Paper transport board and through
the CAN bus:
“I want to cut one picture”
2/ The cutter board sends an acknowledgement message to the PC: “OK, I will do it”.
3/ The cutter board closes the blade (motor ON) and waits for an information from the blade
switch.
4/ When getting the info, the cutter board stops the motor.
5/ The cutter board sends a message to the PC: “OK, it is done now”.
5 Bis/ If not, the cutter board sends a message to the PC: “ Blade failure “.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 2 - p. 27

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Operating Requirements & Principles

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 2 - p. 28 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

Chapter 3 - Installation Instructions

1.Unpacking procedure DKS3 ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������3

1.1 Packing List���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 3
1.2 Unpacking the main module���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 6
1.3 Unpacking procedure for the Optional Second Paper Feeder�������������������������������������12

2. Installation instructions DKS3 �������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 15

2.1. Prerequisites���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������15
2.2. Installing the machine in its permanent position�������������������������������������������������������������17
2.3. Commissioning ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������26
2.4. Starting up the machine ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������30
2.5 Check List / Installation Report�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������38

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 3 - p. 

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 3 - p.  060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

1.Unpacking procedure DKS3

1.1 Packing List
Fill out the form below and return it with the installation report to:
KIS - Quality department
BP 204
38043 Grenoble Cedex
France
[email protected]

Item Description Qty OK

PERSONALIZATION KIT (ENVELOPE 9»x13»)
N060 982 514 RED CAP 1X
N060 217 194 GREEN CAP 1X
N060 928 303 YELLOW CAP 3X
N060 217 195 BLUE CAP 3X
N060 982 554 CLAMP IDENTIF.ROB.RED 2X
N060 982 553 CLAMP IDENTIF.ROB.GREEN 2X
N060 982 551 CLAMP IDENTIF.ROB.YELLOW 4X
N060 982 552 CLAMP IDENTIF.ROB.BLUE 4X
N060 311 365 KODAK CHEMISTRY DOOR LAB 1X
N060 376 328 KIS CHEMISTRY DOOR LAB 1X
N060 311 364 KODAK COLOR WASTE LABEL 1X
N060 311 363 KIS COLOR WASTE LABEL 1X
N060 311 233 KIS COLOR TANK LABEL 1X
N060 311 234 KODAK COLOR TANK LABEL 1X

ACCESSORIES
N980 903 006 BECHER 1X
N060 311 132 41.5L DRAIN CONTAINER 1X
N060 945 687 SMALL TANK 1X
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

TANK PLASTIC COVER 1X

N980 902 001 WASH BOTTLE 1X
N980 903 004 GRADUATED CYLINDER 250ML / 2ML 1X
N060 969 124 FILTER 5X
N060 982 558 MOUSE PAD 1X
N995 002 061 SANDISK 12 IN 1 READER 1X
N060 311 544 PAPER CUTTER RULE 1X
N060 311 459 D10/14 EPDM PIPING 1X
N060 320 861 HARNESS OF MAINS CE (* see below) 1X

(*) USA only: use only approved power cord set (not supplied with the minilab), SJT type, 3
conductors 14AWG and appropriate voltage according to use.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 3 - p. 

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

N060 375 923 POWER CORD.C14/C13 UL 1 2X

N991 602 439 RED COLLAR THICKNESS 4.8 1X
N980 903 005 THERMOMETER 32/42C 1X
N991 847 013 LIGHT D35MM 35W 12 1X
N982 010 120 NUT THIN HM M20 ZN 3X
N060 311 250 CLAMP 1X
N991 904 314 FUSE 10x38 10A UL 1X
N991 904 405 FUSE 10.3X38 15A 600V 1X
N186 950 100 DONGLE BOX 1X
N060 310 721 CD SOFT DKS3 1X
N060 310 731 CD MASTER OS XPE DKS3 1X
DKS3 backup CD 1X
SPRING PLASTIC BAG 1X
N060 311 494 DOUBLE SPRING 1X
N060 928 281 SPRING 1X
N060 375 725 SIMPLE SPRING 1X
N060 311 493 SIMPLE SPRING 1X
N060 970 109 SPRING DOUBLE 28 1X
N060 984 990 RJ11 CORDSET LG. 20M 1X
BOOKLET PLASTIC COVER 3X
N060 310 713 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS DKS GEN3 1X
N060 310 711 USER MANUAL DKS GEN3[ENG] 1X
N060 310 710 USER MANUAL DKS GEN3[FRA] 1X
N060 982 684 CALIBRATION CHART KODAK 1X
N060 311 553 CALIBRATION CHART FUJI 1X

DRYER RACK
ENVELOPE WITH CUSTOMER DOSSIER 1X
DELL ACCESSARY PACK 1X
MOUSE 1X
KEYBOARD 1X
DARK ROOM
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

N060 311 406 DOUBLE TRACK CARTRIDGE 1X

SINGLE TRACK CARTRIDGE 1X
N060 311 483 BOTTOM BLOCKING FOLDER 2X
N060 311 484 TOP BLOCKING FOLDER 1X
PACKING
N060 311 489 PLASTIC COVER 1X
N060 982 598 SHORT FLANGE 4X
N982 740 008 WASHER M 8N A2 4X

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 3 - p.  060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

N981 791 008 SCREW CHC M8X16 ZING 4X

N981 791 008 TIRE-FOND H D=10X80 4X
UNPACKING INSTRUCTIONS DKS GEN3
N060 310 712 1X
PACKAGE LABEL DKS1X__SINGAPORE 1X
N987 514 040 CORN CART 53,5x53,5x3,6 4X
N060 982 405 LABEL LOGO KIS 1X
N987 550 007 SHOCK INDICATOR STICKER 1X
N987 550 001 YELLOW SHOCK INDICATOR 1X
N060 376 465 PACKAGE LANEL «DO NOT STACK» 4X
N987 550 003 TILT INDICATOR 1X
N987 550 005 TILT INDICATOR STICKER 1X
N060 311 468 PALLET 1X
N060 311 469 FOLDING BOX COVER 1X
N060 311 470 FOLDING BOX BELT 1X
N060 311 471 RAMPE PALLET 1X
N060 311 485 TOP BLOCKING MACHINE 1X
N060 311 476 FRONT/REAR BLOCKING MACHINE 2X

Comments:

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 3 - p. 

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

1.2 Unpacking the main module

Before unpacking, check the shock and tilt indicators fixed onto the packaging near
the identification labels.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

Remove the vertical tightening straps and the top

of the DKS3 packaging

Warning ! Detach the check-list of material fixed onto the machine's protection
box.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 3 - p.  060 311 714 B 12/2007

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

Remove the boxes (paper magazine + options if any) fixed on top of the machine.

Remove the ramp from the poly-

uréthane foam fixed on top of the
machine

Pinch to remove the fixing ele-

ments

Remove the main cardboard box

and the polyurethane foam on top
of the machine.

Remove the plastic protection

cover. Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

Remove the desiccant bag and the

envelope containing the backup
folder from the stacker.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 3 - p. 

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

Remove the lag screws fixing the machine to the pallet (2 at the front and 2 at the back of the ma-
chine).

Unscrew the 2 lag screws as shown above to remove the front removable panel.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

Remove the polyurethane foam located on both sides of the machine

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 3 - p.  060 311 714 B 12/2007

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

To remove the pairs of wedges and lower the machine onto its wheels, see below:

1- Unscrew the lag screws

(use an extension bar if necessary)

2- Slide the pairs of wedges apart

using a hammer: hit the upper part of
the wedge only, towards the center Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

3- Lower the machine onto its

wheels.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 3 - p. 

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

Remove the 3 lag screws located at

the front end of the pallet.

Slightly lift the pallet, using one of

the free wedges to release and
remove the base, as shown.

Put the polyurethane foam back

into place on each side of the
machine.

Fix the Velcro straps of the ramp

onto the pallet.

Unlock the wheels and roll the DKS3 carefully through the ramp onto the ground.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 3 - p. 10 060 311 714 B 12/2007

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

Unscrew the flanges under the ma-

chine. 2 at the front, 2 at the back.

Remove the box containing the small

accessories from the exposure deck.

Remove the desiccant bags (2):

1 in the dark room.
1 tank side.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 3 - p. 11

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

1.3 Unpacking procedure for the Optional Second Paper

Feeder
This concerns the 1610 / 1650 / 1670 / 1710 / 1770 versions of the DKS3.

Before unpacking, check the shock and tilt indicators fixed onto the packaging.

The packaging includes :

- the second paper feeder module
- the top and the bottom panels
(top panel ref. 060 311 169 -
bottom panel ref. 060 311 170 + screws)
- the paper guide (to be assembled by a technician on
the exposure deck + 2 fixing screws)
ref. : 060 310 516

Remove the vertical tightening straps and the ramp.

Remove the top cover of the additional paper

feeder and the protection foams.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

Lift the box to remove it.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 3 - p. 12 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

Cut the cardboard box at each corner to

remove the protection foams.

1
Lift the optional feeder module (1) to
remove the supporting foam (2), starting
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

where the wheels are located.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 3 - p. 13

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

Carry out the same operation on the opposite side.

Install the ramp and roll the module onto the ground.

The second paper feeder is ready to be installed on the machine. Please refer to "Instal-
ling the Second Paper Feeder" in the "Installation Instructions", ref. : 060 310 713 A.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 3 - p. 14 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

2. Installation instructions DKS3

2.1. Prerequisites

2.1.1. Tools required

Allen key 2.5 Cross tip screwdriver

Allen key 7 1 level
Flat spanner 10 tubular socket wrench
Flat spanner 14

2.1.2. Packaging content

The Module should include :

1 box containing the

small accessories

Small accessories S/A : 12 in 1

multimedia reader / fuse 10x38 10A
UL / fuse 15A 250V delayed / becker
5L/100ml / graduated cylinder 250/2
ml / stirring device / tray / wash bottle
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

/ filtre / proj. lamp D35mm 35W 12V /

thermometre 32/42°C / D10/14 EPDM
hose / Kis mouse pad / cable flange /
CE mains power cord / the manuals /
the installation check-list.

a- Remove the box from the exposure deck

b- Remove the 3 desiccant bags (1 in the dark room, 1 in the drying unit and 1 tank
side).

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 3 - p. 15

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

2.1.3. Conditions for installing the machine

The surface area needed to operate the machine includes the floor space and access to
the external doors and to the machine itself. An area of 0.99 m2 (1.25 m2 if the second
paper feeder and the additional chemistry unit are present) 24" < around the machine
must be left clear for servicing purposes.

IMPORTANT: the surface area must support up to 800 kg for the machine
equipped with all options and full of chemistry.

1 inch = 2.54 cm
10 cm
4 inches

61 cm
24 inches

61 cm
24 inches
81 cm
32 inches
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 3 - p. 16 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

2.2. Installing the machine in its permanent position

2.2.1. Connections

a - Remove the rear panel (5 screws).

b - Install the dongle related to the machine delivered in the software CD box.
c - Check the different connections in the PCB cabinet.
d - In the power supply cabinet.
if the main voltage < 208 V, remove the shunt and install the connector of the insulation trans-
former (chemistry circulation pumps) as shown on the pictures below.
USA only: use only approved power cord set , SJT type, 3 conductors 14AWG and appropriate voltage
according to use.

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

Main voltage > 208 V Main voltage < 208 V

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 3 - p. 17

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

2.2.2. Installing the PC

a - The computer is ready installed in the machine.
b - Connect the PC 230 V supply cord.

CAUTION! Connect the PC and its screen on the two sockets next to the red line (left photo
below). If you connect the PC and the scanner on these two sockets, the required power could
not be provided (the PC may run slower and both PC scanner may work randomly).

PC DELL GX 620

Keyboard
RJ45 - Network Mouse
USB 12 in 1 multimedia reader
USB ports :
scanner IM1500
Pro + Epson
flatbed VGA - Moni-
PARALLEL PORT - Dongle

SERIAL

Connect the dongle.

Connect the correct connection of the PCI HDMI CAN board and of the modem card.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

(HDMI: black cable on the right picture; CAN : red cable on the picture above)
Connect : mouse, keyboard, 12 in 1 Memory Card reader

2.2.3. Installing the screen

Connect :
the SVGA screen
the touch screen serial port (optional)
and the main power supply
Screen calibration will be done later (in case you have the touch screen option).

Check that all the power switches are on 1.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 3 - p. 18 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

2.2.4. Connecting the scanner IM1500 Pro

1. Install the scanner in its place on the minilab, under

the screen.
2. Connect the USB2 cord in the connector (this wire
is connected to the PC).
3. Disconnect one side of the ground wire, and
connect it to the scanner's pin.
The ground cable is located under the metallic cover
over the PC.
4. Connect the power supply cord.
5. Set the scanner's switch on ON position.

USB2 Connection

Power switch
Power supply

Ground

CAUTION! Connect the PC and its

screen on the two sockets next to
the red line (left photo below). If
you connect the PC and the scanner
on these two sockets, the required
power could not be provided (the
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

PC may run slower and both PC

scanner may work randomly).

USB ports :
scanner IM1500
Pro + Epson
flatbed

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 3 - p. 19

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

2.2.5. Installing the Flat Bed Scanner

2.2.5.1. Installation

Position the Flatbed scanner on its specific support (for the Main Module only - otherwise, the
scanner is placed on the Additional Module). Insert the foam supplied with the support.

2.2.5.2. Connexions

Connect the Slide function

Unlock the transport protec-

tion system.
USB: orange

Connect the power Connect the USB cable

supply transformer

USB ports :
scanner IM1500
Pro + Epson
flatbed
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 3 - p. 20 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

2.2.6. Installing the Second Paper Feeder (optional)

a - Remove the left panel of the machine

(3 screws)

b - Remove the 4 fixing screws from the

framework (CBLX M6 x 16)

c - Remove the electrical box rear panel

d - Loosen the 2 screws fixing the rear

flange of the PC + 1 screw fixing the
lateral flange, and push the PC backwards
to the limit stop.

e - Install the paper guide on the exposure deck (2 screws). Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

Tube of the machine frame Additional module's support lug

f - Position the module on the two lugs of the machine's frame.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 3 - p. 21

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

g - and fix the second paper feeder module using the CBLX M6 x 16 screws. Do not tighten.
At this point, the wheels of the module are not necessarily in contact with the ground.

4 CBLX M6 screws

Bring the module's wheels in contact with the ground without pressure.

Adjust the parallelism of the feeder with respect to the exposure deck using the 2 fixing screws.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

2 fixing screws

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 3 - p. 22 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

h - In order to fix the cable, remove the

following:
* the top cover of the machine
* the tank rear panel
* the DEV effluent tank
Run the cable as shown on the diagram.

i - Connect the cable onto the elec-

tronic board: J20.

IMPORTANT! Make sure you

plug the metallic connector onto
the paper feeder's electronic
board. Pluging the black covered
connector could cause an electri-
cal short-circuit of the board.

j - IMPORTANT ! Lift up the 2 swit-

ches of the paper feeder.

k - Put the 2 top covers back into place:

on the machine and on the additional
paper feeder module.

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

Fixing is to be performed inside the

module (4 pre-installed screws)

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 3 - p. 23

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

l - Complete the covering of the machine:

2 panels

Top panel (2 screws)

Bottom panel (1 screw)

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 3 - p. 24 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

m - Carry out the cabling of the paper feeder (plugging the black connector this time). Do
not forget to fix the cable using the dedicated grommets.

grom-

n - Check the alignment between the

paper magazine and the paper feeder.
Alignment is normally pre-set in factory.

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

In the case of a misalignment greater than 1.5 mm, please refer to the Service Manual,
chapter "Repairing & Adjusting".

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 3 - p. 25

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

2.3. Commissioning
2.3.1. General

a- Check compliance with electrical power supply requirements.

b- Level the machine: adjust the wheels until the DKS3 is levelled.
3 adjustable wheels need to be levelled with respect to 1 fix wheel (the left rear wheel).

Wheel access:
 Expo deck door
 Waste tanks panel
 Concentrated chemistry door

c- Put the rear panel back into place and lock the wheels.
d- Check that the general power supply switch on the side of the machine is in the OFF position.
e- Install the retaining vat under the machine.

f- Fill the processing tank with chemicals.

2.3.2. Preparation and Chemistry Application

Before chemistry application – check all the taps are closed!!!

Fill the tanks STABILISER, BLEACH-FIXER and DEVELOPER according to the process described on
the preparation sheet (see instructions in appendix A).
To save chemistry, re-use old chemistry from another machine (up to 3 machines for prepared De-
veloper & Beach)

CAUTION:
(Protect the developer tank with paper when filling the bleach tank in order to avoid
contaminating the developer tank.) ,
• When handing chemicals or the racks, use the recommended protection
equipment.
• Skin contact with certain products may cause irritation or an allergic
reaction.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

• In the event of contact with skin or eyes, immediately wash with abundant
fresh water.
• In the event of swallowing or splashing into eyes, consult a doctor

Check there is a correct fluid level inside each tank division, if not reach the expected level by putting
water directly in the tank.
Check the correct meshing of the gear on each rack with the motor drive pinion.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 3 - p. 26 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

2.3.2.1. PREPARATION OF KIS SP20 EM CHEMISTRY

Chemical processor
water (25°C-30°C) developer concentrated
9.05 l starter 300 ml developer 650 ml
(066123113) (066123110)

+ + = 10 L
water concentrated bleach/fix Bleach/fix starter
4.750 l 4.750 l (066123111) 500 ml (066123114)

+ + = 10 L

water concentrated stabilizer (066123112)

11 L 200 ml

+ = 11.2 L (x3)

Replenishment chemicals
water 22 L
Developer

Bleach/fix

Stabilizer Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 3 - p. 27

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

Warning: it is very important to comply with the sequence of operations.

1. Remove the 5 racks .

Note: make sure that all rollers and springs are correctly
positionned.

2. Rinse the racks.

3. P
ut 9L +/-0.5L of water (using the 5L beaker provided with the machine) into each of the 3
stabilizer tanks.

4. Add 200 ml +/- 10 ml of sp20em Stabilizer 066123112 into each of the stabilizer tanks.

Important: Take care not to pour down the stabilizer too quickly because it would produce
too much foam.

5. I nstall the stabilizer racks and top up each tank with water to overflowing.

6. P
ut 4L +/-0.5L of water in the bleach/fix tank.

7. Add 4.750 L +/- 100 ml of sp20em concentrated Bleach Fix 066123111.

8. Add 500 ml +/- 10 ml of sp20em Bleach Fix Starter 066123114. Gently homogenize the bath.

9. Install the bleach fix rack and top up with water to overflowing.

10. Put 8L +/-0.5L of water into the developer tank.

11. Add 300 ml +/- 10 ml of sp20em Developer Starter 066123113.

12. Add 650 ml +/- 20 ml of sp20em concentrated Developer 066123110. Gently homogenize the
bath.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

13. Install the developer rack and top up with water to overflowing.

14. Install the tank cover and close the processor.

15. Connect a developer bottle SP20EM (066123110), a bleach/fix drum SP20EM

(066123111) and a stabilizer drum (066123112) to the servicing panel.

16. Fill up the water supply.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 3 - p. 28 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

2.3.2.2. Reminder of the rules of proper conduct

 Color code: yellow = developer – green = bleach/fix – blue = stabilizer –

black = starters.

 A few drops of bleach/fix in the developer are sufficient to contaminate it.

 Always prepare the initial baths following the sequence stabilizer, bleach/fix and developer. The
same order is applied for the introduction of the racks.

 Do not put developer into a drum, which has previously contained bleach/fix.

 Every evening, rinse the equipment used during the day.

Always wear protective gloves when preparing the chemicals: skin contact with the
liquids (and especially during servicing) may cause allergies.

Reference Name Packaging Autonomy

066 123 110 SP20EMSP20EM Developer 4 x 2.4L 889 m²
066 123 111 SP20EMSP20EM Bleach fix 4 x 2.4L 222 m²
066 123 112 SP20EMSP20EM Stabilizer 4 x 2.4L 1375 m²
066 123 113 SP20EM/QP80 Universal Developer Starter 1L /
066 123 114 SP20EM/QP80 Universal Bleach fix Starter 1L /

Note: check that the machine is still level after the tanks have been filled.

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 3 - p. 29

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

2.4. Starting up the machine

2.4.1. Getting started

a - Plug the machine into the mains.

b - Set the general power supply switch to "ON".

c - When the WINDOWS screen is displayed, check that you are logged on in customer mode
("dks").

d - Quit the DKS application and log on in "ADMINISTRATOR" mode [Password: DKSLF].

e - Click on the "flatbedscan" icon on the desktop, and follow the instructions displayed on the
monitor.

f - Adjust PC time and language.

g - In "Chimie.exe" (C\DKS\chimie.exe) check the chemicals:

 Replenishment rates
 Dilutions
 Bath temperature
 Processor speed (20 sec: 180 Hz; 30 sec: 120 Hz; 45 sec: 80 Hz)

h - In C\DKS\Configurator.exe
(name : ADMINISTRATOR / Password: SERVICE)
Check the DKS configuration according to customer wishes.

i - From the "Letter Configurator" icon on the desktop, launch letter and follow the instructions
displayed on the monitor.

j - Launch "DKS" application.

In the main configuration screen, press Heating and programme the Automatic heating mode.

k - On the screen, check the speed of the racks according to the settings of "Chimie.exe" (20 sec:
180 Hz; 30 sec: 120 Hz; 45 sec: 80 Hz).

l - Validate in SU/New Replenisher/ ok. [Password: 'user' ]

m - Check that the baths are heating.

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

n - Check that there is no leak.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 3 - p. 30 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

2.4.2. While the baths are heating

2.4.2.1 Replenishment pump adjustment

 In order to fill the hydraulic circuit

 Remove the pump panel
 Check the path of the chemistry from the bottle to the tank: filter / pump / arrival
into the tank

Shunt the pipe supplying the tank with the

tube pliers.

SPECIFIC REV PUMP SHUNTING :

CTO REV input pipe

For each of the flow (low and big) repeat the following operations before measurement:
- Actuate one cycle (20 or 40 turns depending of the flow) with the hydraulic circuit closed
(chemical going straight to the tank).
- Actuate another cycle after having opened the output of the pipes, chemical should drop
into a test tube, do not make the measurement and put back the chemical into the regenerating
tank.

Measurement can now be done:

Nota: small flow measurement can be made at the same time. But DO NOT MAKE big measurement at
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

the same time.

Once the pump is ready for measurement, use a 250 ml test tube and actuate one cycle (40 turns)
on the pump.

Supply Tank Ref Test 40 turns 1st 40 turns 2nd Max Min
tube measure measure
Developer DEV 250 ml 125 ml ±15 ml 125 ml ±15 ml
BL/FIX BL 250 ml 125 ml ± 15 ml 125 ml ± 15 ml
Stabiliser STAB 250 ml 125 ml ± 15 ml 125 ml ± 15 ml
CTO CTO 250 ml 125 ml ± 15 ml 125 ml 15 ml

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 3 - p. 31

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions
Big Flow

Pumps measured SEPARATELY – "pump activation" 20 turns.

Once the pump is ready for measurement, use a 250 ml test tube and actuate one cycle (20 turns)
on the pump.

Supply Tank Ref Test tube 20 turns 1st 20 turns 2nd Max Min
measure measure
Water H2O 250 ml 204 ml ± 15 ml 204 ml ± 15 ml
Water H2O 250 ml 204 ml ± 15 ml 204 ml ± 15 ml
Water H2O 250 ml 204 ml ± 15 ml 204 ml ± 15 ml

2.4.2.2. Check the tank operation

• Check that the tank high and low level detection is operational by lifting the correspon
ding rack.
• Check the high and low tank level detection.
• Check all fluid levels are green.
• Raise rack carefully few cm– indicator should become orange -
• Raising rack more should change colour to red.
• Repeat this for each tank division.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

• Check the effluent overflow level detection.

• Check the correct operation of the circulation pump by feeling the vibrations on the
filter carrier.

 In the Super User mode (password = tec)

• Calibrate the densitometer
• Check the zero position of the lens turret and the LCD.
• Check and measure the LED's offset.
• Check the camera and the optical settings
• Perform an LLCD stability test and then perform the LCD response measurement.
• Check the flicker.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 3 - p. 32 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

2.4.2.4. Calibrating the EloTouchScreen

1. From the desktop, open the config panel (Start, Config Panel) and double-click 'EloTouchS-
creen'. The following screen appears.

2. Click 'ALIGN' and touch the target on different parts of the next screen that appears.

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

3.Validate by OK.
4. Log OFF and log again in DKS mode.
5. Check the Touchscreen is working well on the DKS application.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 3 - p. 33

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

2.4.3. When the baths temperature is reached

2.4.3.1 Checking of baths temperatures

Check the temperature of the baths using the supplied thermometer. Check if the measured
temperature corresponds to that shown on the display. In case it does not correspond, adjust the

Tank section Temperature

Developer 40.1 °C ± 0.1°

BL/FIX 38°C ± 0.3°
Stabilizer 37°c ± 1°

Temperature Offsets Settings

1. Enter SU mode -> settings-> processor-> temperature
2. Measure the temperature away from heaters on each 3 heated tank compartments – put the
values to the dialog boxes. Remember or note the values
3. Press „Calculate» – Correct value of the offset must be inside the (-1.5 ; 1,5) margin for each
bath.
4. Press „Validate» to store the values

2.4.3.2. Checking of dryer temperature

Print a large format and check that it is correctly dry. If not, open C:\DKS\Parametres\
TransportPapier.ini
In the [CUVE] section, modify the following values:
ConsigneAirHaute = 70
ConsigneAirBasse = 60
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 3 - p. 34 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

2.4.4. Tests and adjustments

a - Install the cartridge according to the format used by the customer :
 Follow the installation procedure
 Warning ! cartridges are pre-set for:
DKS series 16 : 152 double-track & 203 single-track.
DKS series 17 : 152 double-track & 305 single-track.

b - Install the paper magazine in the machine as shown below and declare the appropriate for-
mats.

c - Perform the paper setup for all the loaded cartridges.

d - Run right paper calibration and check exposure times during calibration.

 In double track, 152 format paper, run 4 (152x102) prints in full paper, split mode, cente-
ring pattern in spoolin/mires/qualité photo. Check the centering & adjust if necessary.

 For 'Series 16" machines:

 In Super User mode / Control, using a single track cartridge (paper size: 305), print UNI
FORMITY_LENS1_LCD0 and UNIFORMITY_LENS1_LCD90, then check the PRNU.
Check the presence of dead or unbalanced pixels.
 Print a 152 and a 203 format print with white margin
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

 In Super User, using a single track cartridge (paper size: 305), print QUALITY_DKS3_
X9_G15 & QUALITY_DKS3_X9_G15_LCD90 and check the sharpness of the lens.
 Check x9.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 3 - p. 35

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

 For 'Series 17" machines:

 In Super User mode /Control, using a single track cartridge (paper size:
305), print UNIFORMITY_LENS1_LCD0 and UNIFORMITY_LENS1_
LCD90,UNIFORMITY_LENS2_LCD0, then check the PRNU.
Check the presence of dead or unbalanced pixels.
 Run a 152 and a 305 format print with white margin
 In Super User, Control, using a single track cartridge (paper size: 305), print
QUALITY_DKS3_X9_G15 & QUALITY_DKS3_X9_G15_LCD90 and check the
sharpness of lens 1, then print QUALITY_DKS3_X16 and check the sharpness of
lens 2.
 check x9 & x16.

e - If equipped with the Second Paper Feeder option:

 Install a double track cartridge loaded with 152 format paper in the optional paper feeder.
 In the Super User menu, perform the following settings:

 MM/TOP optional paper feeder, 'Debiteurs prepos' (mm/top

tab)
 'Debiteurs & PHD2' (Centering tab)

Check the following:

 For 'Series 16" machines :

 Run a 152 and a 203 format print with white margin

 Using a double track cartridge loaded with 152 format paper, print 4 (152 x 102)
centering patterns in full paper, split mode. Readjust the the centering if neces-
sary.
 Using a double track cartridge loaded with 152 format paper, print 4 black pat-
terns in split mode, and check the absence of scratches on the photo.
 Using a single track cartridge, print 2 black patterns and check the absence of
scratches on the center of the photo.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

 For 'Series 17" machines:

 Run a 152 and a 305 format print with white margin

 Using a double track cartridge loaded with 152 format paper, print 4 (152 x 102)
centering patterns in full paper, split mode. Readjust the centering if necessary.
 Using 305 format paper, print a 305x457 black pattern and check the absence of
scratches on the photo.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 3 - p. 36 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

f. Complete configuration :

 Dedicate two cartridges (1 single and 1 double) as reference cartridges (by prefe-
rence the two cartridges delivered with the machine).
 Check the white margin width and adjust if necessary using the 'white margin'
module in 'paper change'.
 Load the optional paper cartridges chosen by the customer according to the
requested formats.
 Install those paper cartridges into the machine, then declare, calibrate and set the
cartridge lateral offsets by running some patterns with white margin.
 Calibrate the display with the customer.
 Insert the logo index.

2.4.5. In- and output checking

1. Print on 102 paper in auto feed mode:

2. Print from spoolin (one or more photos).
3. One 135 film with reverse side printing + index.
4. One APS film with reverse side printing + index, coloured fringe, FID readout + photo formats
5. slides(optional)
6. One 120 film (optional)
7. Print 4 ID
8. Print 6 ID
9. Scanner A4 (optional)
10. Print numerical data CD, PCMCIA, USB key (Set the chromatic aberration in SU \ Edit \ Scan-
ner Epson)
11. Store an image on USB key.
12. Burn a 135 film to CD/DVD.
13. Print on 203 or 305 paper:
14. Print from spoolin (one or more photos).

2.4.6. Remote maintenance test

Network the DKS with peripherals (if the PC is compatible).

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

2.4.7. Save the configuration

S ave configuration onto a CD by using the ‘save dks’ module (to be attached to the Installation
report).

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 3 - p. 37

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

2.5 Check List / Installation Report

Fill out the form below and return it with the packing list (first chapter of this guide) to:
KIS - Quality department
BP 204
38043 Grenoble Cedex
France
[email protected]

DKS 1610  No:

DKS 1650 
DKS 1710 
DKS 1750  DATE:
DKS 1770 

Technician
name:
Company:

User Customer: Customer Account:

PCAnywhere Phone N°: Customer's email:

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

PCAnywhere IP Address:

Related document: DKS Commissioning Procedure

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 3 - p. 38 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

OK No Value Notes
Installation of the Machine

Select the installation site. (See the Operation

 Manual).  
Check the impact and orientation indicators.
  
Unpack the machine and its accessories.
  
Check that all the accessories are present and that See
they comply with the specifications. Packing
   List in
chapter
3.
Check the site voltage. phase/neutre………..V
phase/neutral.……..V
  phase/terre…………..V

 phase/earth………….V
neutre/terre………….V
neutral/earth………..V

If the voltage is lower than 208, connect the trans-

 former.  
Check the connection of memory board in PC slot
 memory (unplug and plug again).  
Connect the PC:
 Screen, 12/1 reader, keyboard and mouse.
 
 Connect the Dongle.
 
 Connect the IM1500 PRO scanner. Optional
 
 Connect the flatbed scanner. Optional
 
 Install the optional second paper feeder. Optional
 
 Install the machine in its permanent location.
 
 Install the retaining vat under the machine.
 
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

 Fill the tanks with chemicals.

 
 Rinse the processor racks.
 

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 3 - p. 39

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

OK No Value Notes
Getting Started

 Connect the machine to power supply.

 
 Start up the machine.
 
Check the PC startup sequence and DKS applica-
 tion.  
Click on the "flatbedscan" icon on the desktop, and
 follow the instructions displayed on the monitor.  
Adjust PC time and DKS application language.
  
Select the chemistry type (20, 30 or 45 sec).
 
Auto-heating programming.
  
Check the rack motor speed. 20sec: 180 Hz
   30sec: 120 Hz
45sec: 80 Hz
Check the new machine bath (SU/New Replenisher)
  
Heating system operation check
  
Check that there are no leaks.
  
While the baths are heating, check and adjustment of the tank.
Check the replenishment pump delivery rate 40
Rnds.
 Small flow : 125ml +/- 15ml  
Big flow : 204ml +/- 15ml
Check the high and low tank level detection.
  
Check the effluent overflow level detection.
  
Check that the circulation pumps are working.
  
Check or enter the parameters on the densitome-
 ter calibration chart.  
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

Check the densitometer.

  
Check the zero position of the lens turret and the
 LCD.  
Check and measure the LED’s offset.
  
Check the camera and the optical settings.
  
Perform an LLCD stability test and then perform
 the LCD response measurement..  
Check the flicker.
  
This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 3 - p. 40 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

Elo Touch Screen Calibration

  
When the control temperature is reached:

Check and adjust the temperature display offset

  
Large format dryer checking
  
Print UNIFORMITY_LENS1_LCD0 and UNIFOR- DKS 16X0 only
MITY_LENS1_LCD90, then check the PRNU.

Check the presence of dead or unbalanced pixels.
 
Print a 152 and a 203 format print with white mar- DKS 16X0 only
 gin.  
On 305 paper, print QUALITY_DKS3_X9_G15 & DKS 16X0 only
QUALITY_DKS3_X9_G15_LCD90 and check the

sharpness of the lens.
 
Check X9. DKS 16X0 only
  
Print UNIFORMITY_LENS1_LCD0 and UNIFOR- DKS 17X0 only
MITY_LENS1_LCD90, then check the PRNU.
 Check the presence of dead or unbalanced pixels.  
Print a 152 and a 305 format print with white mar- DKS 17X0 only
 gin.  
On 305 paper, print QUALITY_DKS3_X9_G15 DKS 17X0 only
& QUALITY_DKS3_X9_G15_LCD90 and check
 the sharpness of the lens 1, then print QUALITY_  
DKS3_X16 and check the sharpness of lens 2.
Check X9 and X16. DKS 17X0 only
  
With double-tack cartridge, 152 paper, check MM- On
Top optional paper-feeder. optional
   paper-
feeder
With double-tack cartridge, 152 paper, check 'Debi- On
teurs & PHD2' optional paper-feeder. optional
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

   paper-
feeder
Print a 152 and a 203 format print with white mar- DKS 16X0 only On
gin. Check and readjust the centering. optional
 paper-
feeder
Print a 152 and a 305 format print with white mar- DKS 17X0 only On
gin. Check and readjust the centering. optional
 paper-
feeder
Calibrate the display with the customer
  
This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 3 - p. 41

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

Insert the index logo

  
OK No Value Notes
Check inputs / outputs: check the photo
quality + cropping

Print on 102 paper in auto feed mode:


Print from spoolin (one or more photos).
  
One 135 film with reverse side printing + index. Optional
  
One APS film with reverse side printing + Optional
index, coloured fringe, FID readout + photo

formats  
slides Optional
  
One 120 film Optional
  
Print 4 ID
  
Print 6 ID
  
Scanner A4 Optional
  
Print numerical data CD, PCMCIA, USB key (Set the
chromatic aberration in SU \ Edit \ Scanner Epson)
  
Store an image on USB key.
  
Burn a 135 film to CD
  
Print on 203 or 305 paper.

Print from spoolin (one or more photos).
  
Perform remote maintenance tests.
  
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

Network the DKS/DLS with peripherals

 (if the PC is compatible)  
OK No Notes
Saving the configuration

Save the configuration to a CD. Leave it

   in the
drive
Save the configuration to a CD. Leave it
in the
   drive

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 3 - p. 42 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

KIS - Quality department

Please return this form to: BP 204
38043 Grenoble Cedex
France
[email protected]

Note 1: the instructions must be carried out in the correct order. Only the set points and
monitoring points specified «while the water is heating» can be obtained «while the chemicals are
heating» if the water heating time is too short.

Note 2: you are advised to use warm chemicals for the processing baths (they should be at, or
slightly below, the set temperature).
Note 3: caution: demineralised water must be used if the hardness exceeds 20° (French standard).

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 3 - p. 43

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Installation Instructions

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 3 - p. 44 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Preventive Maintenance

Chapter 4 - Preventive Maintenance

1. Maintenance carried out by the technician��������������������������������������������������������������� 3

2. Maintenance carried out by the customer���������������������������������������������������������������� 5

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Preventive Maintenance

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 4 - p. 

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Preventive Maintenance Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Preventive Maintenance

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 4 - p.  060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Preventive Maintenance

1. Maintenance carried out by the technician

Preventive maintenance is to be performed every 12 months.

The report has to be filled out and signed by both technician and customer.

TECHNICIAN: COMMERCIAL STAMP/

SIGNATURE:

DKS VERSION:………………. SERIAL N°:………. CUSTOMER VISA :

ACCOUNT N° :…………….. CONTRACT START:……………..….

DATE :

Action OK Not OK Notes

1 Check that the customer maintenance procedures has been
First

performed.
1 Check the temperature of the baths.
2 Check up of the circulation pumps
3 Check up of the good running of the level sensors in the tank
4 Empty the chemsirty and clean the processor tank and circu-
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Preventive Maintenance

lation pumps.
5 Clean the racks and if necessary change the bearings (green
Tank

ones).
6 Check up and grease of the tangent wheels.
7 Check up of the tension of the belt of the rack motorisation.
8 Check up and greasing of the technical chute’s ball bearings.
9 Change washers of resistors and technical chute.
10 Change the chemical filters.
11 Re do a new chemistry

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 4 - p. 

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Preventive Maintenance

1 Check the foam rolls and change the dryer rack’s bearings.
2 Check the good state of the densitometer’s chart.
Dryer

3 Clean the lens of the densitometer.

4 Change the dryer filters of the drying unit.
5 Check up of the good running of sorter’s cells.
1 Dust the paper feed system.
2 Cleaning of the optical cell, from the exposure plate, and the
backprinter.
Expo

3 Change the dust filters of the exposure chamber.

4 Check up of the tension of the belts of the exposure plate
and of the printer module.
5 If necessary, change the back printer ink ribbon cartridge.

1 Full cleaning and greasing of the paper cutter.

2 Dust the power supply units in the electric housing.
3 Dust the exposure head.
4 Cleaning of the lenses.
5 Check up of the good running of the detection of the ef-
fluents full level.
6 Check up of the good running of the level sensors 100%of
Misc

the water tank.

7 Check the replenishment pump flow. If necessary change the
poppets.
8 Open and dust the PC
9 Check up of the position of the home sensor of the lenses
touret with DiagDKS
10 Check up of the speed of the racks motor.
20 sec = 180Hz 30 sec = 120Hz 45 sec = 80Hz
1 Cleaning and check up of the good running of the optionnal
SCANNER (in 135, APS, 120 and flatbed)
Scan

2 If misframing, calibrate the concerned gate following the

procedure.
1 For each step of the S.U make a check and if necessary do
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Preventive Maintenance

the adjustment.
2 Calibration of the densitometer with a the chart.
3 Perform an LCD response
4 Print a PRNU, a sharpness print, a X9 print and set up if
PC adjustments

necessary.
5 Calibration of the different paper sizes.
6 Check up of the white frames with different paper sizes in
dual track.
8 Check up of the chemical parameters (CHIMIE file under C:
\DKS) and paper response.
9 Check up of the colour quality of the prints and of the video.
10 Delete the archives if possible.
11 Save a backup of the configuration (copy CD-R).
This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 4 - p.  060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Preventive Maintenance

2. Maintenance carried out by the customer

Please refer to the User Manual.

6 month
Monthly
monthly
Weekly

Twice

Every
Daily
Cleaning the upper gears of the racks. x
Cleaning of the bodywork, keypad, mouse and screen. x
Cleaning of the upper part of the racks. x
Cleaning of the chemical filters. x
Cleaning of the drying filters. x
Cleaning of the 3 drying stainless steel guides. x
Cleaning the outside of the scanner and the outside of the machine. x
Cleaning the optionnal scanner filter. x
Changing the chemical filters. x
Cleaning the racks. x
Changing the scanner lamp. x
Cleaning the tank. x
Changing the densitometer lamp. x
Replacing the back printer ink ribbon cartridge. When necessary
Changing the chemicals. When necessary

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Preventive Maintenance

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 4 - p. 

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Preventive Maintenance Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Preventive Maintenance

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 4 - p.  060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

Chapter 5 - Repairing & Adjusting

1. Paper Cartridge��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 3
1.1. Full presentation of the Paper Cartridge������������������������������������������������������������������������������3
1.2. Mechanical adjustments������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������5
1.3. Cycles�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������9
1.4. Electronic drawing������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 12
1.5. Connectors information�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 13
1.6. Changing components����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 14

2. Paper Cutter������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������17
2.1. Full presentation of the Paper Cutter�������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 17
2.2. Mechanical adjustments��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 20
2.3. Software adjustment�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 21
2.4. Electronic adjustment for the paper cutter detection��������������������������������������������������� 23
2.5. Cycles���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 24
2.6. Electronic drawing������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 27
2.7. Connectors information�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 29
2.8. Changing components����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 30

3. Paper Buffer��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������39
3.1. Paper buffer view�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 39
3.2. Buffer cycles����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 40
3.3. Buffer roller pressure auto adjustment������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 43
3.4. Buffer board����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 44
3.5. Technical information�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 46
3.6. Changing components����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 47
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

4. Paper Exposure Plane��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������49

4.1. Paper exposure plane advance��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 49
4.4. Paper aspiration����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������
4.2. Paper exposure plane positioning cells������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 50
4.3. Paper exposure plane light measurement cell������������������������������������������������������������������ 50
4.4. Paper vacuum��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 51
4.5. Auto adjustment of the pressure of the Exposure plane belts������������������������������������� 52
4.6. Auto-adjustment of the pressure of the extractor belts����������������������������������������������� 53

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

4.8. Electronic drawing������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 54

4.9. Exposure plane board������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 55
4.10. Changing components��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 57

5. Exposure�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������63
5.1. Principle of exposure������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 63
5.2. Exposure in the machine������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 67
5.3. Exposure synoptic������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 68
5.4. LedMot board�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 70
5.5. Sequencer board��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 79
5.6. Piezo board������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 81
5.7. Epson driver board����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 86
5.8. Sharpness setting��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 88
5.9. Changing parts������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 90

6. Back printer module����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������99

6.1. Full presentation of the back printer module������������������������������������������������������������������� 99
6.2. Mechanical adjustments of the printer module�������������������������������������������������������������� 100
6.3. Cycles�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 101
6.4. Electronic drawings��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 104
6.5. Exposure plane board���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 106
6.6. Changing components��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 108

7. Tank������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 113
7.1. Heating������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 113
7.2. Replenishment����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 129
7.3. Switches���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 142
7.4. Tank drive and shaft�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 150
7.5. Densitometer������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 161
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.6. Dryer��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 171

7.7. Sorter�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 181

8. PC���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 189
8.1. Changing the PC�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 189
8.2. Changing the PCI LVDS CAN board�������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 189

9. Appendix���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 191
9.1. Stepper motors��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 191
9.2. Reflective IR sensors operation����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 193
This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p.  060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

1. Paper Cartridge
1.1. Full presentation of the Paper Cartridge

1.1.1. Paper positioning

The simple paper cartridge can receive the following widths of paper:

89 mm 102 mm 114 mm 127 mm 152 mm

3.5 inch 4 inch 4.5 inch 5 inch 6 inch

The double paper cartridge can receive the following widths of paper:

89 mm 102 mm 114 mm 127 mm 152 mm 178 mm 203 mm 240 mm 254 mm 305 mm

3.5 inch 4 inch 4.5 inch 5 inch 6 inch 7 inch 8 inch 9 inch 10 inch 12 inch

The two rollers are positioned in the cartridge thanks to some positioning wedges (A). The paper
is driven thanks to the driving rollers (B). Clutches (C) allow manual feeding and avoid paper going
buck completely inside the cartridge. The cartridge also features paper detection cells (D) and
transition hole cells (E) on previous DKS versions (see next page).

C
C

A B

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

External connector

E
D E
This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

1.1.2. Simple-track and double-track paper cartridges

The paper guide of the cartridge differs on simple and double track cartridges (see pictures below).

Simple-track cartridge: one roller Double-track cartridge: two rollers

Simple-track cartridge Double-track cartridge

1.1.3. Paper detection

The cartridge detects whether the paper is present or not.
The paper width is not detected, but is kept in memory by the DKS application. In order not to
insulate the paper, The cells are powered up only when necessary.
The paper detection cell used (A on pictures below) is always the same whatever the paper
width.

Note: paper detection holes are not used anymore (see explanations below).
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

A
A
Simple-track cartridge Double-track cartridge

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p.  060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

1.2. Mechanical adjustments

1.2.1. Driving roller pressure

This is an automatic pressure adjustment of the driving rollers (A on left picture below) against the
free rollers (B on left picture below). This adjustment is done by a spring system made up of 4 pres-
sure springs (C on right picture below where the free rollers are seen from the back side).

A C

1.2.2. Paper width

Simple cartridges feature two wedges to position the paper roll depending on its width.
Double cartridges feature three wedges (two adjustable wedges, A on pictures below, plus a fix cen-
tral one, B on pictures below) to position the paper rolls depending on their width.
On each kind of cartridge, landmarks (C on pictures below) are engraved to help you to position the
wedges in relation to the paper width.

Note: to know more about how to load paper rolls in the cartridge, see the chapter 'Using machine opera-
tion' in the User Manuel.

A B A B A
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

C
This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

1.2.3. Cartridge support adjustment

Int the first place, make sure the two reinforcement bars which are normally sold under the support
are still there (it did happen on some of the first machines that the welding was not good enough).

Bottom view of the two bars Top view of the two bars in
in blue. red.

The cartridge should be adjusted in two dimensions: height and depth.

1.2.3.1. Height

The horizontal parts of the cutter and

cartridge should be aligned,even when
the lock is open (see red line on op-
posite picture).
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p.  060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

1.2.3.2. Depth

If the cartridge is
not deep enough When well
the cartridge gear adjusted it
does not fit on the fits perfectly.
cutter gear.

1.2.3.4. Adjustment procedure of height

1. Release the lock of the cartridge to unlock it. Check the level of
the cartridge comparing to the one of the cutter.

2. Remove the cartridge.

3. Dismantle the two cartridge guides (see opposite picture).

4. Add or remove some washers under the guides (see opposite

picture).

5. Put back the guides by always using the middle position (see pictures below). Do not tight the
screws!
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

6. Install the cartridge and make sure it is properly positioned on the guides (it should be on the metal-
lic bearings).
7. Push the cartridge in position and check the level. Adjust if necessary by adding or remove more
washers.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

1.2.3.5. Adjustment procedure of depth

1. Put the rear guide in the maximum front position.

2. Put the cartridge’s guide and push the cartridge’s guide on “closed” position (push on the support,
not on the cartridge since guides are not tigthen).
3. If necessary push on the cartridge so that the gear will be in front of the cutter gear: Pushing the
cartridge will also push the rear guide on right position.

Wrong
Right

4. Take everything out and tight the rear guide screws.

5. Put bac the cartridge, push it on position, and push on the front guide (keep about 0.5mm play between
the cartridge and the guide.

6. Tight the front guide screws.

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p.  060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

1.3. Cycles

1.3.1. Cartridge management

START

User clicks « RIGHT CARTRIDGE » or ‘LEFT CARTRIDGE »

« RIGHT
Paper Calls Rewind
CARTRIDGE » or
rewinded from Management
Rewind cutter to
‘LEFT
function (see
CARTRIDGE »
cartridge next diagram)
yellowed button

Paper not correctly rewinded Rewind completed

« RIGHT CARTRIDGE »
Door
Rewind Error or ‘LEFT CARTRIDGE » Unlock
reded button unlocked

Waiting Door
Opening
User does not open door
User usually changes in less than 30s
User opens door in less than 30s
cartridge

« RIGHT CARTRIDGE »
Door Opened or ‘LEFT CARTRIDGE »
greyed button Locking Reading
Door Locked
door cartridge
User closes door

« RIGHT CARTRIDGE » Cartridge unreadable

Reading
Door Closed or ‘LEFT CARTRIDGE » « RIGHT
cartridge
yellowed button CARTRIDGE »
Cartridge or ‘LEFT
Cartridge readable Unreadable
CARTRIDGE »
Cartridge readable greyed button
Cartridge
unreadable
Send to computer
Cartridge
cartridge
Readable
Cartridge parameters
Unreadable
Cartridge known Cartridge unknown

Cartridge
Unknown

User enters cartridge parameters: paper size, paper length, ...

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

Legend of text Cartridge Cartridge Calls Feed

parameters sent to Door locked Management function
Black text in frame: Status Known DKS3 (see last diagram)

Red text: User action

Paper not correctly feeded
Blue text: Physical event
Paper correctly feeded « RIGHT CARTRIDGE »
Green text: Non-physical event Feed Error or ‘LEFT CARTRIDGE »
reded button
Legend of links
« RIGHT CARTRIDGE »
Arrows: Possible paths Door Locked or ‘LEFT CARTRIDGE »
greened button
Bold arrows: Ideal path
Dotted lines: Status/events
associations
END

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

1.3.2. Paper rewind management

PAPER MOVING

Pre-pos paper Paper cartridge

Sensors Reading
sensor sensor

-Paper on cartridge sensor

- Unknown beginning status
- Paper on pre-pos sensor
- Blade open
- No paper on cartridge sensor
- Paper on pre-pos sensor
- No paper on pre-pos sensor
- No paper on cartridge sensor

Unstartable Sensor
No Paper
Configuration Inconsistency

« Paper Feed is « Paper Feed is

« Paper Feed is
aborted because of aborted because of
aborted because
unstartable sensor
Paper Detected there is no paper »
configuration » inconsistency »

No Paper on pre-pos sensor Paper on pre-pos sensor

Feeder Motor Paper Moves Paper Moves Feeder Motor

Forward Forward Backward Backward
Movement finished &
no change of presetting
paper sensor

Failed

« Paper insertion/
extraction has failed
(timeout) » No paper on
Paper on pre-pos sensor pre-pos sensor
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

PAPER REWIND
REWINDED ERROR

Legend of text Legend of links

Black text in frame: Status Arrows: Possible paths

Red text: User action Bold arrows: Ideal path
Red text in wavy frame: error message Dotted lines: Status/events associations
Blue text: Physical event
Green text: Non-physical event

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 10 060 311 714 B 12/2007

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

1.3.3. Paper feed management

PAPER
MOVING

Presetting paper Paper presence

Sensors Reading
sensor sensor

-Paper on cartridge sensor

- Start status unknown
- Paper on pre-pos sensor
- Blade open
- No paper on cartridge sensor
- Paper on pre-pos sensor
- No paper on pre-pos sensor
- No paper on cartridge sensor

Calls Blade
Blade Opening Opening
Function
Unstartable Sensor
No Paper
Configuration Inconsistency
timeout

« Paper Feed is « Paper Feed is « Paper Feed is

Paper Feed aborted because of aborted because of aborted because of
Blade opened Failed unstartable there is no paper » sensor
configuration » inconsistency »

« Paper feed failed

because of timeout of
blade opening »

Blade Opened

Paper on pre-pos sensor

No Paper on pre-pos sensor

Feeder Motor Paper Moves Paper Moves Feeder Motor

Forward Forward Forward Backward Legend of text
Black text in frame:
Movement finished &
no change of presetting Status
paper sensor Red text: User
action
Red text in wavy
frame: error
Failed message
Blue text: Physical
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

event
Green text: Non-
« Paper feed/
extraction has failed physical event
(timeout) »
No paper
Paper on pre-pos sensor on pre-pos sensor Legend of links
Arrows: Possible
paths
Bold arrows: Ideal
path
Dotted lines: Status/
PAPER FED FEED ERROR events associations

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 11

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

1.4. Electronic drawing

Note: the green parts of the drawing above actually represent the electronic boards (paper cutter board on the left
and cartridge board on the right).

Note: the green parts of the drawing above actually represent the electronic boards (paper cutter board on the left
and cartridge board on the right).
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 12 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

1.5. Connectors information

Pin on cartridge Name Test point Value

1 GND J1.7 GND
2 Data J1.6 Not controllable
3 Clock J1.5 Not controllable
4 SH/LD J1.4 Not controllable
5 TAG J1.3 Not controllable
6 12V_Cmd J1.2 +12V
7 Supply (12V) J1.1 +12V

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 13

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

1.6. Changing components

Before changing any of the following components, follow the procedure below.

1. In your DKS application, make sure the STOP/GO button is red.

2. Click on the cartridge button to remove the cartridge.

Note: to know more about the handling of the cartridge, see the chapter 'Using machine operation' in the
User Manuel.

1.6.1. Changing the S/A Rewind

1. Open the cartridge.
2. Remove the paper rolls or their cores from the cartridge.
3. Remove the S/A Rewind coil from the cores.
4. Carry out these operations in the reverse order to reassemble the system.

Note: when you change the rewind coil, check for smooth of roller rotation and ensure that the cartridge
closes without problem.

Note: to know more about how to load paper rolls in the cartridge, see the chapter 'Using machine operation'
in the User Manuel.

1.6.2. Changing the Paper cutter connection

1. Open the cartridge.

2. Unscrew two screws to remove the black card mask (see opposite picture).

3. Once the black card mask removed, disconnect the cartridge link harness
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

(see opposite picture).

4. On the outside of the cartridge's inferior body, unscrew two screws to remove the receiver board
mask and the paper cutter connection board (see left and middle pictures below).

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 14 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

5. Remove the PCB S/A by pushing from inside.

6. Unscrew two nuts to separate the receiver board mask and the paper
cutter connection board (see opposite pictures).
Carry out these operations in the reverse order to reassemble the system.

Note: mind the cable when reassembling the system

(see opposite picture).

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 15

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 16 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

2. Paper Cutter

2.1. Full presentation of the Paper Cutter

2.1.1 Paper advance

This function is carried out by four rollers (A and A' on next page's picture). Large sizes of paper
are driven by the four rollers simultaneously, smaller sizes can be driven independently on the two
tracks by two rollers.
The motor rollers are driven through gears by two stepper motors (B on next page's picture)
plugged onto the cutter can board (C on next page's picture). This connection is made through a
resistor (D on next page's picture) which limits the current.
There is also a paper detection cell close to the blade. This cell is also connected to the cutter can
board.

Profile view of the paper cutter (paper path)

Cartridge pinion
Stepper motor
Motor pinion

Gear

Paper
Motor roller
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

Paper detection Free roller

PCB
Emitter cell (prepos sensor)

Blade

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 17

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

3D view of paper cutter

B
B

A'

Paper detection PCB

Emitter cell
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

Note: the paper path is pointed out by the white arrows on the picture above.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 18 060 311 714 B 12/2007

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

2.1.2 Paper cutting device

To cut the paper, there is a system of moving blade and fix counter blade.
The blade is activated by a DC motor, and we have two switches to detect the blade position
(open, closed).

Fix counter blade

Bl
ad
e
m
ov
em
en
t

Blade's location

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 19

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

2.2. Mechanical adjustments

- No mechanical adjustment of the paper cutter assy on the machine’s frame.

- No manual adjustment in the cutter but two automatic adjustments made by an automatic spring
pressure control system (right pictures below) :
2.2.1. Static auto-adjustment of the roller pressure
To adjust the rollers pressure, install the
blue rollers in position, unscrew the A
screw so that the spring (B on picture be-
low) pushes the roller support. Then tighten
the screw.

Note: do not tighten too much A screw.

A B

Note: the arrows on the picture above show how the blue rollers can easily be installed or removed.

2.2.2. Dynamic auto-adjustment of the blade pressure

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

After any intervention on the cutter assembly, it is mandatory to check the paper centring
and to adjust it if needed.
This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 20 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

2.3. Software adjustment

Two types of software adjustment should be done.

2.3.1. Mm / Top cutter

The goal of this adjustment is to determinate the gear reduction of each cutter so that the length of
the pictures is OK.

Instructions of adjustment

Each of the INTERNAL and EXTERNAL (Optional) cutters contains 2 elementary Back and Front
tracks. The operations described here after should be repeated for all four (or two if there is no
optional external cutter assy).
The STOP/GO button of your DKS application should be red.
Click on the square showing the cutter to calibrate. A message appears saying that the picture has to
be manually taken out from the exposure plane. Validate this message, a paper length about 300 mm
is cut. Take it on the exposure plan after having opened the black chamber door.
Measure the length which should be about 300mm appreciating 0,1mm.
Enter the value on the screen. Click on CALCULATION, and verify that the new values are OK (that
is to say that there is no error when typing in the values).
Typical values: 0.157 +/- 1%
Click on OK. The new values are saved in C:\DKS\parametres\transportpapier.ini

Example of transportpapier.ini file:

[MM_PAR_TOP]
LongueurPasDebiteurExterneArr=0.160400 External Cutter Backward direction
LongueurPasDebiteurExterneAv=0.158500 External Cutter Forward direction
LongueurPasDebiteurInterneArr=0.157900 Internal Cutter Backward direction
LongueurPasDebiteurInterneAv=0.157800 Internal Cutter Forward direction

Proceed on the same manner for the two or four paper tracks.

Checking instruction

Checking consists in cutting another time and checking that the lengths are about 300 mm +/- 0.1
mm.

Trouble shooting
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

The length of pictures is not stable, and the adjustment does not seem to work: there is a mechanical
problem with the paper cartridge or the paper cutter. Manually take out paper from the cartridge and
“see” if the paper gets out smoothly with a low and continuously torque. Open the paper cutter and
check the roller pressure and their fixation (see previous page).

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 21

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

2.3.2. Paper cutter pre-positioning sensors Mm / Top

The goal of this adjustment is to determinate the position of the pre-positioning sensors of the paper
cutters comparing to the blade position so that the length of the first picture done after a cartridge
loading is good. There is one sensor per track. Each sensor should be calibrated.

Instructions of adjustment

Each of the INTERNAL and EXTERNAL (Option) cutters contains 2 elementary Back and Front
sensors. The operations described here after should be repeated for all four (or two if there is no
optional external cutter assy).
Load a double cartridge in the paper cutter to calibrate.
The STOP/GO button of your DKS application should be red.
Click on the square showing the cutter to calibrate. Two pictures per track are cut and exposed (4
per paper cutter), wait for the picture.
Measure the length of the 4 pictures appreciating 0,1mm.
Enter the value on the screen. The CALCULATION button becomes available. Click on it, and verify
that the new values are OK (that is to say that there is no error when typing in the values).
Typical values: -20 +/-1mm (INT) or 154 +/-2mm (EXT)
Click on VALIDATE. The new values are saved in C:\DKS\parametres\transportpapier.ini
Proceed the same way for the second paper cutter.

Checking instruction

Checking consists in printing another time and checking that the lengths are identical between each
other +/- 0.1 mm.

Trouble shooting

1. The length of pictures is not stable, and the adjustment does not seem to work: there is a mechani-
cal problem with the paper cartridge or the paper cutter. Manually take out paper from the cartridge
and “see” if the paper gets out smoothly with a low and continuously torque. Open the paper cutter
and check the roller pressure and their fixation (see technical manual).
2. Error while loading the cartridge: check with DIAGDKS that the paper cutter and cartridge sen-
sors are working properly.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 22 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

2.4. Electronic adjustment for the paper cutter detection

Depending on the presence or not of the optional second paper cutter unit, you should adjust
the top (A on pictures below) and bottom (B on pictures below) switches on the interface board
(for the CAN BUS detection).

Second paper cutter connector

A A

B B

Without any optional With second paper

paper cutter. cutter connected.
Internal cutter only With external cutter

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 23

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

2.5. Cycles

2.5.1. Cartridge Management

START

Blade opening « Blade opened »

Opening Blade opening
error sensor reading

Blade opened

«paper presence »
Paper not detected Detection Paper detection
sensor reading

Paper detected

Cancellation &
Error Waiting for
Waiting
Management synchronization

Not enough
paper
Synchronization detected
software knows tracks
number (no hardware
detection)

2 tracks (see diagrams) How many tracks to feed?

1 track (see diagrams)

Not enough
paper

Blade closing Not

error enough
paper Make the track
«paper
Pre-advance of the advance the Feeder
Feeder Motor presence
Pre-Advance longest photo (see Track Advance equivalent of a Motor
Forward » sensor
diagrams) photo lenght (see Forward
reading
diagrams)
Pre-advance OK
Not enough
paper Make the tracks advance
Feeder «paper
the equivalent of the
Tracks Advance Motor presence »
shortest photo (see
Forward sensor reading
diagrams)

Advance OK Advance OK

« Blade closed »
Paper Cut Blade closing
sensor reading
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

Legend of text
Blade closed

Black text in frame: Status

Rewind paper of Feeder Motor
Rewind
X mm backward
Red text: User action

Blue text: Physical event

X parameter defined in « TransportPaper.ini »:
END
Green text: Non-physical event
[TRANSPORT]
NB_PAS_POUR_EVITER_FRITE = X

Legend of links

Arrows: Possible paths

Bold arrows: Ideal path

Dotted lines: Status/events associations

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 24 060 311 714 B 12/2007

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

2.5.2. Cancellation and error management

START

Blade closing Not enough

error paper

Blade opening
error
Paper not detected Feeder Motor
REWIND PAPER Paper move backward
backward

No paper on
pre-pos sensor

« Paper feed failed « Paper feed failed « Timeout while detecting paper on the
because of timeout of because of timout of paper feeder sensors or sensors « Timeout while detecting paper on the
cutter closing » cutter opening» already detected before paper feed » paper feeder sensors or sensors
already detected before paper feed »

Legend of text paper «STOP/GO »

Cancellation
evacuation reded button
Black text in frame: Status

Red text in wavy frame: Error message

Blue text: Physical event END

Green text: Non-physical event

Legend of links

Arrows: Possible paths

Bold arrows: Ideal path

Dotted lines: Status/events associations

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 25

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

2.5.3. Single or double track feed

Single Track Feed

Single Track

Make the track advance the

Track Advance
equivalent of a photo lenght

Advance OK

Double Track Feed

Longest
photo
Tracks may
have
different
widths

Double Track

Pre-advance of
Pre-Advance the longest
photo

Pre-advance OK

Make the tracks

Tracks Advance advance the equivalent
of the shortest photo
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

Advance OK

Pre-pos IR Paper (right track)

sensors
Feeder Cartridge

Cutter

Legend of text Legend of links

Black text in frame: Status Arrows: Possible paths Feeder

motors Paper (left track)
Red text: User action Bold arrows: Ideal path
Red text in wavy frame: error Dotted lines: Status/events associations
message
Blue text: Physical event
Green text: Non-physical event

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 26 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

2.6. Electronic drawing

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 27

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

See the cutter CAN board drawing on previous page.

Below is a drawing allowing you to locate the different test points of the card.

Additional information about the cutter can board.

Paper Feeder Motor N°1

Motor TP 25(V) Winding Max Current (A)
Stopped 4.5 0.55
Working 24 3

Paper Feeder Motor N°2

Motor TP 26(V) Winding Max Current (A)
Stopped 4.5 0.55
Working 24 3

Cutter Motor
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

Motor TP 22(V) TP 16(V) TP 15(V) TP 30(V)

Stopped 0 3.3 0 0
Working 3.3 0 24 max. 2 max.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 28 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

2.7. Connectors information

Paper presence emitting Connector

Test point Driven Not driven
sensors J3
Sensor command 12 TP18 12V 0V

Paper presence emitting Connector

Test point Paper No paper
sensors J6
Front receptor 1-2 TP4 3.3 V 0V
Rear receptor 3-4 TP5 3.3 V 0V

Connector
Blade switches Test point Switch open Switch Closed
J3
GND 11 - - -
Switch blade open 9 TP10 3.6V 0V
Switch blade closed 10 TP11 3.6V 0V

Connector
Blade DC motor Test point ON OFF
J4
GND 10 - - -
Motor control 9 TP15 24V 0V
Motor intensity - TP30 200mV/100mA 0

Paper presence emitting Connector

Test point Driven Not driven
sensors J3
Cartridge sensor com-
15 TP29 12V 0V
mand
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 29

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

2.8. Changing components

2.8.1. Removing the paper cutter from the machine

1. In your DKS application, make sure the STOP/GO

button is red.
2. Click on the green button of the cartridge.
3. Remove the cartridge.
4. Quit the DKS application.
5. Shut your machine down.
6. Unplug the machine.
7. Open the door.
8 Pull the back printer (make it slide on its track).
9. Disconnect the paper cutter (the connector is
located in the exposer plan, under the back printer).
10. Remove the security plate in between the paper
cutter and the stacker.
11. Unscrew 6 torx screws (see red circles on op-
posite picture): two of them cannot be easily seen (a
T20 wrench is required).
12. Do not touch the two big flat screws.
13. Remove the paper cutter and put it on a table.
14. Remove the output paper guide.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 30 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

2.8.2. Opening the paper cutter

A. Blade's side:

Remove the plastic cover (4 T20 screws indicated by the

arrows on the opposite picture).

B. Rollers' side:

1. Pull on the flap door S/A (A on picture below) to remove it from the paper cutter.
2. Remove the two plastic pinions (B on picture below) by unscrewing the two cross-threaded T10
screws (for each pinion).
3. Unscrew the four big Torx T30 screws (C on picture below).
4. Remove the black cover (D on picture below). Be careful of the connector's harness (E on picture
below).

C E

B
C

C
B

C
A
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

5. Remove the cable from the first clip (see opposite picture).

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 31

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

2.8.3. Changing the switch

Note: make sure to notice the position of the wires on both switches before changing them.
B
Remove the two T10 screws (A on opposite pic-
ture). A
Disconnect the wires.
Change the defective switch(es) (B on picture). C
Connect the wires to the new switch(es). A
Put the clamp (C on picture) and the two T10
screws back in place.

2.8.4. Changing the blade B C A B

Remove the keeping bar (A on opposite

picture) by unscrewing the two T20 screws
(B on picture).
Remove the blade (C on picture) by pulling
it upwards.
Change the blade.
Put the keeping bar back in place by screw-
ing the two T20 screws.

2.8.5. Changing the counter blade

A A
Remove the two big flat screws (A on op-
posite picture) as well as the two positioning
cones.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

Note: well remember the position of the counter

blade before removing it.
Remove the counter blade, change it and install
it by putting the screws and the positioning
cones back in place.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 32 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

2.8.6. Changing the blade's motor and mechanism

Note: before changing the motor, it is necessary to remove the blade (see the dedicated paragraph: Chang-
ing the blade).

A. Dismantling

1. Make sure to note the connection wise of the motor (+ and -).

2. Disconnect the motor, then remove the three T10 screws (arrows
on opposite picture).

3. Previously remove the B pinion (see left picture below). For this, remove the T10 screw so that
you can take the C rod out of its place.

Note: if necessary, hold the opposite screw as shown on right picture below.

Note: if necessary, turn the B pinion so that you can access to the D keeping BTR2 screw.
4. Loosen the D screw and remove the B pinion.
5. Finally remove the A screw. The motor can be removed underneath.

Note: do not remove F gear.

C
E
A
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

B F

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 33

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

B. Reassembling and indexing the gears

B1. Aligning the gear and the motor shaft

Because it is new, the motor shaft's flat section might be in wrong position.
To align it properly, put the gear in it with a small 1.5 allen key inside the hole and turn it until the key
falls down in the frame hole (see pictures below).

Turn the gear, so that the 2 holes are aligned.

Once the key is down in the hole, the gear is in the right position, as well as the motor shaft.

B2. Aligning the second gear

1. Remove the B pignon gently so that you do not move the shaft.
2. Manually turn the second gear so that the key you put in its hole falls down in the
second frame hole (see opposite picture).

Hole
Second gear
B3. Installing both gears

Once the second gear in place, now fit the first one. Both gears should have the holes aligned with
their corresponding frame hole.

B4. Tighting the gears

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

Manually turn the gear so that you have access to the fixing screw and tight it.
Easy access for
Right position allen key

Cutter frame (no Tighting position

access for allen key)
Once tighten, come back in the right index position and check the holes.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 34 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

2.8.6. Changing the driving roller

Remove the clip (A on pictures below) so that you can take the pinion (B on pictures below) out of
its housing and you can free the roller. Repeat this operation for the second pinion of the roller.
Note: do not lose the C washer!

A C B

Remove the mounting lugs (red arrows on picture below). B A

Pull the rollers upwards (black arrows on picture below).

Redo the complete Mm/Top setting of the cutter after remounting.

2.8.7. Changing the paper sensor PCB

First remove the driving rollers (see previous paragraph).
Unscrew the four T10 screws of the plastic plate (A on picture below).
Remove the two roller supports (B on picture below) by unscrewing T10 screws.
A B A
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

Pull the plastic plate upwards.

Remove the two T10 screws of the PCB (A on picture below).
Change the PCB (B on picture below). A

B
Redo the complete Prepos sensor setting of the cutter after remounting.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 35

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

2.8.8. Changing the paper cutter CAN board

Remove the two screws from the external connector (see ar-
rows on opposite picture).
From the inside, remove the three screws (A on picture below).
Unplug the 3 connectors (B on picture below) and remove the
plate (C on picture below).
Retrieve the fastenings (D on picture below) and install the
new CAN board (E on picture below) before reassembling it.
A

B B

C D E

2.8.9. Changing the interconnection board

Open the paper cutter.

Note: be careful of the cable (A on picture below) when opening the paper cutter!!! Remove it from D clip.
Remove the T10 screw (B on picture below).
Unplug the connector (C on picture below).
B C A
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 36 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

Remove the second T10 screw (see arrow on opposite pic-

ture).

Remove the clips from the board (see arrows on opposite picture).
Change the interconnection board.

Note: when installing it back, make sure the cover goes under the plastic support (see left picture below).

Note: make also sure the pins are out (see right picture below).

Should be inside
(behind the sup-
port), not over
the frame as
shown here.

2.8.10. Changing the handles

Depending on the paper cutter (internal or optional), handles are not mounted the same way.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 37

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 38 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

3. Paper Buffer

The machine can expose up to four (small) pictures at the same time. 9*13, 10*15 and 11*14 pic-
tures can be exposed four by four.
Over 11*14, pictures are exposed two by two or one by one only.
To reach the printing capacity, we have to prepare a set of four pictures and store it in the buffer
(located in the red dotted frame on the opposite picture) before sending the set onto the expo-
sure plane.

3.1. Paper buffer view

Cutter
Exposure plan motor

Buffer Area

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

Buffer Motor

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 09/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 39

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

3.2. Buffer cycles

3.2.1. Buffer principle

Rollers

Blade
Rollers

Exposure plan Buffer Paper cutter

3.2.1. Buffer stocking small pictures (Max. 114 mm)

To store two pictures in the buffer area, their length should not exceed 114 mm.
Buffer area max. length = 114 mm.

1. The first picture is unrolled.

2. The first picture is cut.

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

3. The first picture advances.

4. The first picture advances.

The second picture is unrolled.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 40 060 311 714 B 09/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

5. The second picture is cut.

Two pictures are ready in the
buffer area.

6. The two pictures are sent to

the exposure plan.

3.2.1. Buffer stocking big (overlapped) pictures

Overlapping area
Pictures longer than 114 mm must overlap in the buffer area.

1. The first picture is unrolled.

2. The first picture is cut.

3. The second picture advances

to overlap the first one.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

4. Both pictures advance to-

gether.

5. The second picture is cut. Two

pictures are ready in the buffer.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 09/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 41

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

6. The first picture is sent to the

exposure plan.

7. The pictures are separated.

8. The buffer motor restarts to

send the second picture to the
exposure plan.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 42 060 311 714 B 09/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

3.3. Buffer roller pressure auto adjustment

Loosen the two screws so

that the spring adjusts the
roller pressure.
Then retighten the screws.

Note: screw all 3 screws in the order shown on opposite picture. If not you may
add some extra pressure on the belt.

1 2 3

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 09/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 43

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

3.4. Buffer board

3.4.1. Electronic drawing

Pin locations on connector

20 19
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

tors block
box resis-
Electrical

37 1

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 44 060 311 714 B 09/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

3.4.2. Board's plan

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 09/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 45

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

3.5. Technical information

Buffer

Paper detection
Paper TP 49 TP 50
Present 0 0
Absent 12 V 12 V

Stepper motor
Paper TP 32
Stopped 5V
Working 24 V

DiagDKS.exe

The path to access the DiagDKS.exe is C:\DKS\Constantes\Tools\DiagDKS.

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 46 060 311 714 B 09/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

3.6. Changing components

Refer to chapter 4 of this same section (Paper exposure plan).

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 09/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 47

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 48 060 311 714 B 09/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

4. Paper Exposure Plane

The paper advance on the exposure plane is made by 24 belts which are driven by the rear step
by step motor through the bottom rollers.

4.1. Paper exposure plane advance

24 paper driving belts

Bottom driving roller

Paper advance rear motor

Buffer
Paper advance belts (24)
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 49

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

4.2. Paper exposure plane positioning cells

The paper exposure plane features 6 paper positioning cells positioned as below:

Rear track: PhdE Phd2 PhdI

Front track: PhdE Phd2 PhdI

Optional Internal
external cutter
cutter side
side

The cells are used for knowing where the paper is and for helping to correctly position it before be-
ing exposed.
• PhdE: external cutter cells
• Phd2: centering cells
• PhdI: internal cutter cells

4.3. Paper exposure plane light measurement cell

1 Paper light measurement cell

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This cell is used for knowing the exact quantity of light falling on the paper.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 50 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

4.4. Paper vacuum

To avoid out of focus pictures and to help for moving pa per thanks to the belts, the paper should be
flat on the exposure plane during the exposure.
For this, a turbine sucks up the paper through hundreds of holes located under the 22 belts.

Paper aspiration

Turbine

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 51

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

4.5. Auto adjustment of the pressure of the Exposure plane belts

Adjust the roller position

to tighten the belts.

Loosen the two screws to adjust the two

screws on each side so that the spring
gives the right pressure.
Once this is done, retighten the screws.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 52 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

4.6. Auto-adjustment of the motor belt's tension

Loosen the 3 screws to let the spring adjust the tension of the motor's belt.

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 53

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

4.8. Electronic drawing

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 54 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

4.9. Exposure plane board

4.9.1. Transport Board

2
4

5
1
3
1

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 55

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

4.9.2. Technical information

Exposure plane (motor stopped)

Transistors TP 79(V) Winding Transistors TP 75(V) Winding

state Current (A) state Current (A)
T50 or T51 1 1.2 T53 or T52 1 1.2
‘ON’ ‘ON’
T50 and T51 0 0 T53 and T52 0 0
‘OFF’ ‘OFF’

The test points of the table above are located by 1 on the previous page's board drawing.

Stepper motor
TP TP 73(V)
Stopped 5
Working 24
The test point of the table above is located by 6 on the previous page's board drawing.

Note: there is no resistance of current limitation, because the motor is driven in current intensity.

Exposure plane turbine

Blower TP 47(V)
Stopped 0
Working 12
The test point of the table above is located by 2 on the previous page's board drawing.

Paper detection_Central Log board 060 310 868

Paper LD7 TP63 LD8 TP64
Present ON 0 ON 0
Not present OFF 12V OFF 12V
The Leds and test points of the table above are located by 3 on the previous page's board drawing.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

Paper detection_Left double detector board 060 310 838

Paper LD10 TP66 LD9 TP65
Present ON 0 ON 0
Not present OFF 12V OFF 12V
The Leds and test points of the table above are located by 4 on the previous page's board drawing.

Paper detection_Right double detector board 060 310 838

Paper LD21 TP67 LD22 TP68
Present ON 0 ON 0
Not present OFF 12V OFF 12V
The Leds and test points of the table above are located by 5 on the previous page's board drawing.
This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 56 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

4.10. Changing components

Before changing any of the following parts, follow the procedure below.

1. In your DKS application, make sure the STOP/GO button is red.

2. Quit the DKS application.
3. Shut the machine down.
4. Unplug the machine.
5. Open the exposure room.
6. Remove the left lateral panel.
7. Pull the knob (red arrow on left opposite
picture) to take out the printer drawer
from the exposure room (black arrow on
right picture opposite).

8. Unplug the harness and the power supply from the exposure plane
(see opposite picture).

9. Remove the two BTR6 screws and their washers in front of the front
flange (see opposite picture).

10. Loosen the BTR6 screw (1 on opposite picture) behind

the rear flange. Let your tool go through the hole to access
1
the screw (2 on opposite picture).
2

11. On the right side of the exposure room (on the cutter), un- 1
plug the harness (1 on opposite picture) loosen the screw (2 on
opposite picture). Remove the plate by lifting it. Then remove the 2
feeder outlet nose (3 on opposite picture) by pulling it.
3

Note: repeat step 10 on the left side of the exposure room in case you have an optional paper feeder
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

module.

12. Take hold of both sides of the exposure plan, lift it on the left side to
take it out of the exposure room (see opposite picture).

Note: if you do not have an optional paper feeder, the simplest way to take out
the exposure plane (once all previous steps have been carried out) is to open
the left side panel and to take out the exposure plane through it.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 57

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

4.10.1. Changing the buffer motor belt

Note: the procedure is the same for each motor belt (front and rear flanges).

1. Unscrew the two screws of the belt protection plate of the

front/rear flange (see both opposite pictures ) to remove the
protection plate.

2. Loosen the three screws of the stepper motor to loosen the belt tension
and remove it (see opposite picture).

3. Remove the spring (see opposite picture).

4. Change the belt and carry out these operations in the reverse order to
reassemble the system.

4.10.2. Changing the tension springs

Note: the procedure is the same for each tension spring (front and rear flanges).

1. Unscrew the two screws of the belt protection plate of the

front/rear flange (see both opposite pictures ) to remove the
protection plate.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

2. Change the roller extension spring(s) (1 on opposite picture)

and/or the motor tension spring (2 on opposite picture). 1

3. Carry out these operations in the reverse order to reassemble 2

the system.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 58 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

4.10.3. Changing the stepper motors

1. Turn the exposure plane upside down to access the motors more 1
easily.
2. Remove the black cable ties (1 on opposite picture).
3
3. Remove the harness ties (2 on opposite picture).

4. Disconnect the motor(s) from the exposure plane

harnesses (3 on opposite picture).
2
5. Remove the motor tension spring (1 on opposite picture).

6. Unscrew the three fixations screws, remove them as well

as their washers (2 on opposite picture).
1 2
Note: carry out these operations in the reverse order to
reassemble the system.

Redo the complete Mm/Top setting of the exposure plane after remounting.

4.10.4. Changing the Photodiod cell box and/or the expo cell box

1. Unscrew the two Torx T10 screws of the box to be changed (see left picture below).
2. Spray the belts to remove the box from the exposure plane.
3. Remove the exposure plane motor belt (see dedicated paragraph before).

Note: in case the belts are too tightened to be sprayed, remove the tension spring (1 on right picture below)
and loosen the two screws (2 on right picture below) in order to move the belt tension roller and thus loosen
the tension.

2
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

3. Unscrew the two screws to separate the board and its box (see both pictures below).

4. Carry out these operations in the reverse order to reassemble the system.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 59

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

4.10.5. Removing the front flange

Note: you need to remove the front flange before changing a roller, a belt, the static relay or the fan.

1. Unscrew the two screws of the belt protection plate of the

front/rear flange (see both opposite pictures ) to remove the
protection plate.

2. Remove the motor belt (see previous dedicated paragraph).

3. Disconnect the motor from the exposure plane harness.
4. Remove the two notched pulleys by unscrewing their screws (see
opposite picture). Then remove the belt.
5. Remove one screw from the left flange spacer (1 on picture below)
and one screw from the right flange spacer (2 on picture below). Then
remove all the screws and nuts maintaining the exposure plane (all
other arrows on picture below).
6. Remove the two screws, the plate and the spring (dotted frame on picture below).

6. Remove the front flange.

Note: the rollers disengage freely from the front flange when you remove it.
7. Carry out these operations in the reverse order to reassemble the system.
Note: ensure the rollers can rotate freely after having reassembled the system.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

4.10.6. Changing the belts

1. Remove the front flange (see previous paragraph).

2. Put the exposure plane on the rear flange.

3. Remove the belt and slot in the new one (see opposite picture).

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 60 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

4. Lie the exposure plane flat and place neatly the belts in the correct
position (in the roller grooves).
5. Reassemble the front flange.

Note: ensure the rollers and the belts can rotate freely once the front flange
remounted.

Note: use some tape to hold the belts while reassembling (see opposite
picture).

Redo the complete Mm/Top setting of the exposure plane after remounting.

4.10.7. Changing the fan, the condensor and the static relay

1. Remove the front flange and the belts (see two previous paragraphs).
2. On the rear flange, unscrew three screws (see left picture below) to remove the exposure plate
(see right picture below).
3. Remove the connector 3 and put it through the hole of the flange.

4. Lift up the exposure plane.

5. Disconnect the fan harness (see left picture below) and the earth wire (see right picture below).

Fan wire
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

Earth wire

6. To change the fan, on the bottom side of the exposure plane, unscrew four
screws (see opposite picture).

7. Unplug the condensor to change it.

8. Unplug the static relay to change it.
9. Change the fan and carry out these operations in the reverse order to reassemble the system.
Redo the complete Mm/Top setting of the exposure plane after remounting.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 61

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

4.10.8. Changing the static relay

1. Remove the front flange and the belts (see two previous paragraphs).
2. On the rear flange, unscrew three screws (see left picture below) to remove the exposure plate
(see right picture below).

3. Disconnect the wires from the static relay (see left picture below) and unscrew two screws to
remove the static relay (see right picture below).

4. Change the static relay and carry out these operations in the reverse order to reassemble the
system.

Redo the complete Mm/Top setting of the exposure plane after remounting.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 62 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

5. Exposure

5.1. Principle of exposure

Exposure is a technic allowing to obtain a permanent image with the action of the light on a sensi-
tized surface.

Two operations are repeated to reproduce the subject on the paper:

1. Exposure
2. Development (to obtain a positive image)

5.1.1. Exposure operation

It consists in exposing in three primary colors (RGB) through a support on photo paper.
The image support can be a negative image or a LCD screen.

Light source

Manual
Service Negative image or
DKS3
LCD screen

Lens

Print paper
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 63

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

The LCD screen does not emit light. It is a monochrome passive device whose transparency changes.
It must be lit up sequentially in Red, Green and Blue. This light source is made up of three types of
monochromatic Leds: Red, Green and Blue.

It is very important to understand that DPI means something only when printing an image on a physi-
cal support. The DPI points out the number of pixels put on an inch. The 300 DPI standard corre-
sponds to what the eye can see in close-up.
Since 300 DPI correspond to 118 pixels per centimeter. Thus, the needs for 300 DPI prints can be
calculated like this:
• for one 300 DPI 10x15 photograph, 2 Megapixels are required (1181 x 1772);
• for one 300 DPI 20x30 photograph, 8,3 Megapixels are required (2362 x 3543).
The LCD has a certain number of pixels. There is an "e" space between each of them (see below).

e space
LCD

The lens has a fixed Gain. Thus, the "e" space results in e x G, G being the enlargement ratio on the
paper (see below).

e exG
Photo paper

It is then impossible to carry out only one exposure. In order to fill in this space on the paper, a pixel
addition is required according to the lens (see the two schemes further).

A compromise should be found between the LCD size, the used lens, the different formats and the
necessity to respect at the very least the 300 DPI standard.

• If a lens with strong magnification is used, the pixels to be added are multiplied and a small format
LCD can be used (the advantage is to have a smaller lens, but the drawback is to slow down the pro-
duction because the pixel addition, and thus the exposure addition, is then multiplied.
• If a lens with a small magnification is used, the pixel addition is reduced (the advantage is to increase
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

the production, but the default is to require a bigger LCD).

To work with all the paper sizes, only two lenses are required:
• Lens 1 has a 15.5 magnification gain and lens 2 has a 19 magnification. For this objective, G=15.5.
Two pixels must be added to fill in the space. As shown in scheme 1 on next page, 9 exposures are
necessary while the LCD must be displaced 8 times to shape the image.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 64 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

Scheme 1
Space = e x G
1 2
3 4
Expo. 1 Expo. 2 Expo. 3 Expo. 1
D1
1 D2
2
D3
Expo. 6 Expo. 5 Expo. 4 View on LCD screen
D5 D4

D6
Expo. 7 Expo. 8 Expo. 9
D7 D8

Expo. 1 Expo. 1
3 4 D = displacement (of
the LCD)

• Lens 2 has a higher magnification gain (19). So it requires 3 pixels to fill in the space between two
original pixels. As shown in scheme 2 below, 16 exposures are necessary while the LCD must be
displaced 15 times to shape the image.

Scheme 2
Space = e x G 1 2
3 4

Expo. 1 Expo. 2 Expo. 3 Expo. 4 Expo. 1

D1
1 D2 D3
2
D4
View on LCD screen
Expo. 8 Expo. 7 Expo. 6 Expo. 5
D7 D6 D5
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

D8
Expo. 9 Expo. 10 Expo. 11 Expo. 12
D9 D10 D11

D12
Expo. 16 Expo. 15 Expo. 14 Expo. 13

D15 D14 D13

Expo. 1 Expo. 1
D = displacement (of
3 4 the LCD)

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 65

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

5.1.2. Optical subassembly

The exposure operation is made thanks to the exposure head subassembly.

Exposure head Red LEDs source

Diffusers

Blue LED
source

Dichroic
filters
Green LED source
LCD block
Polarizer

LCD screen

Polarizer
Optical barrel
Objective

Lens

Paper
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 66 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

5.2. Exposure in the machine

The exposure is made up of a system allowing the projection of a RGB image on photo paper.

The goal of this system is to regenerate a digital image in an analogical image. For this, the system
must be driven by a FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Away), circuit designed for the digital signal
processing.
This FPGA manages the moving of the LCD block (x9 and x16), the moving of the lenses, the rotation
0° - 90° of the LCD, and the Leds source.

Original im-
age

Image
decomposed
into digital image
parts
FPGA
System

Image processing in
DKS3 application Leds
software

0° - 90°

Motor

X Y
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

Motor

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 67

 060 311 714 B 12/2007
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

-12V +5V +24V

+24V
J2 J3
1 2 3 5 1
+12V
4
Led mot board
CPLD
3 M
B B Objective
+12V 2

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.
Led C 4
G G N Barrel initialization sensor
Led
A LCD initialization sensor
R R SPI
Leds 1
Fan +12V
M
3
LCD
2
SPI
CAN +12V
J4 4
LCD motor
Bus SPI
Optical
Power
sensor
board Sequencer board J3 Piezo
Bus SPI
Bus SPI CNA
+24V Power DC/DC
PC HDMI-
converter
type
J12 FPGA SPI SDRAM +5V 100V
5.3. Exposure synoptic

PCI Connector
LVDS 8 Mb
Regulator
LCD
FPGA Temp
+15.5V Reg
J4 J5
LCD driver board X Y
+15.5V +5V
33 Mhz Bus

Chapter 5 - p. 68
CTN
T1 & T2
LCD heating
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

All the commands coming from the PC are decoded by a FPGA-type single circuit. This circuit, that is
embedded in the sequencer board, is linked to three different boards:

• the Led mot board

• the piezo board
• the driver board

A diagnosis programm, DiagEpson.exe, exists that checks the correct working of the optical S/A.
This programm is under C:\DKS\Constantes\Tools\DiagEpson.
In the same folder, you can find a 'DiagEpsonLCD.ini' file. It helps to set the DiagEpson programm like
the visualization of added pages.

Example:
P_DUMMY=0
Increasing this value to 1 (P_DUMMY=1) permits to visualize the temperature of the LCD block.

To run DiagEpson, you should download the firmware at first, then a 'optique.ini' file and 'epson.ini'.

Note: you have to be in the programmation tab to download the firmware (see picture below).

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 69

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

5.4. LedMot board

5.4.1. Power supply

J4
J8 20
TP 1 22
+12V +12V +12V 24
+12V 1 Regulator Regulator Regulator +5VA

TP 7
10.24V
TP 2 XV_B_V
TP 15 23.78V
XV-R

Led 100
Piezo
Led 102 board’s
ribbon
TP 14
cable

TP 4
-12V 2 Regulator -5VA

-12V
28

TP 17 +5VP
+5VP TP 22 14
+5V 3 Regulator 3.3V 16
18
TP 16 12
4
+24V 5 26
6

The low power supply of the optical S/A arrives on the J8 connector and is dispatched on the piezo
board through the J4 socket.
It also permits to supply the leds (XV_R voltage to supply the red leds, XV_G and XV_B identical
voltages to supply the green and blue leds).
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 70 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

5.4.2. Use of the Led source

The red and blue colors are controlled at 95% of the Leds intensity maximum. This intensity is neces-
sary to have short exposure times.
For the blue color, this intensity on the Led is useful to carry out light measuring (because the mea-
suring cells are not very sensitive to blue).
On the contrary, this intensity permits to have extremely short exposure times (0.1 ms), since the
paper is very sensitive to the blue color.
Such short times cannot be conceived, because the required light level within a delay shorter than
1ms can oscillate because of the regulation which is difficult to compensate.
Therefore, the blue Led should be controlled with two light set points:
• one for measuring
• the other for printing

This applies to the three colors.

The current set point for production is the one for measuring with an added offset.

Measuring current set points:

DAC_12_V1_ROUGE (Rouge = Red)

DAC_12_V2_VERT (Vert = Green)
DAC_12_V3_BLEU (Bleu = Blue)

Production current set points:

DAC_12_V1_ROUGE + OFFSET_PRODUCTION_ROUGE (Rouge = Red)

DAC_12_V2_VERT + OFFSET_PRODUCTION_VERT (Vert = Green)
DAC_12_V3_BLEU + OFFSET_PRODUCTION_BLEU (Bleu = Blue)

The measuring current set point is used for:

• SuperUser setting (Flicker, Focus, Offset settings, Polarizers, LCD gain, LLCD stability, LLCD re-
sponse).

The printing current set point is used for:

• LCD measuring before order printing;
• Exposure during all the printings.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 71

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

5.4.3. Resolution on exposure times

The values of density on the paper are obtained by varying the R,G,B exposure times.
These exposure times should be resolved with an accuracy permitting to obtain a sufficient accuracy
of density on the paper.
They are obtained with the calculation using the light measured on the exposure plane. This measure-
ment is logarithmic.
This last resolution generates a resolution by calculating the exposure times. Thus, the exposure reso-
lution does not have to be greater than the resolution generated by the cell.

5.4.4. Exposure times

The R,G,B exposure times differ from each other. With the Led lighting system and for the DKS3,
x15 and x19 lens, the exposure times for each image part are:
• Red: 190 ms
• Green: 38 ms
• Blue: 8 ms.

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 72 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

5.4.5. Led source calibration (done in SU mode)

START

Send instructions and

reads intensity (Ic) in Led
to be calibrated (Red,
Green or Blue)

Yes
Ic < (Ratio_Min) x IMax

No

Yes
Ic > (Ratio_Max) x IMax

No

Increases Decreases Assigns and takes new

instruction instruction RGB instructions into
account
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

End

Note: this setting should be done before any other optical setting.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 73

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

5.4.6. Led and production offset calculation

START

LLCD measurement in
RGB

Calculation of exposure
times on selected paper:
T(R), T(G), T(B)

New_Offset calculation for

RGB

Calculation of new
exposure times

No
Validation

Yes
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

Update of ‘optique.ini’
OFFSET_Production_Rouge
OFFSET_Production_Vert
OFFSET_Production_Bleu

End

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 74 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

5.4.7. Leds management

5.4.7.1. Red led management

Sequencer TP 2 TP 33
board LedMot Board
XV_R A_LED_R
F 23.78V 2.2
J9
P 1
G
A TP 23
442 mV max K_LED_R 2
Red Led power
BUS R limitation security
SPI Consigne + TP 11
G + 482 mV max
Sequencer
board
B - I_R
- AD
Converter
FPGA

+5V

TP 5 Led 117
Red Led
Log
Amp.

J19
Cmd_R
1
2
3
4
5

Coaxial
cable

Sequencer
board
FPGA

A 23.78V voltage (TP2) is required to supply 7 serial red leds. This regulation is controlled by a
field-effect transistor. A photodiod converts a light signal (red leds) into electrical signal. This signal is
amplified and compared with a current set point. This set point is the image of 95% of the red leds'
max. current. A current's protection ensures not to exceed a maximal intensity in the leds. Led117
permits to visualize the red leds' command. In TP23, 482mV is the max. voltage we can have. This
value explains that the regulation system is saturated and that there is no more light regulation. A led
calibration (made in the SuperUser mode) is then required to have again a current set point that is
the image of 95% of the led's max. current.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

Note: after a Led regulation and even after having changed the board, it is important to check the PRNU
(see settings in SU mode).

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 75

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

5.4.7.2. Green led management

Sequencer TP 7 TP 36
board LedMot Board
XV_G A_LED_G
F 10.14V 2.2 J17
P 1
G
A
TP 19 K_LED_G 3
442 mV max Red Led power
BUS R limitation security
SPI
Cons.
+ TP 12 454 mV max
G + 1116 mA
Sequencer
board
B - I_G AD
- Converter FPGA

+5V

TP 5 Led 118
Green Led
Log
Amp.

J19
Cmd_G
1
2
3
4
5

Coaxial
cable

Sequencer
board
FPGA

The operation mode is the same than for the red leds. The difference is that power supply voltage for
the green led is 10.14V in TP7.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 76 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

5.4.7.3. Blue Led management

Sequencer TP 7 TP 37
board LedMot Board
XV_B A_LED_B
F 10.14V 2.2 J18
P 1
G
A
TP 20 K_LED_B 4
442 mV max Red Led power
BUS R limitation security
SPI
Cons. + TP 13 455 mV max
G + 327 mA
Sequencer
board
B - I_B
AD
- Converter
FPGA

+5V

TP 5 Led 119
Blue Led
Log
Amp.

J19
Cmd_B
1
2
3
4
5

Coaxial
cable

Sequencer
board
FPGA

The operation mode is exactly the same than for the green led.

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 77

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

5.4.8. Optical and LCD stepper motors management

J4 TP 18 Lens_G J3 Lens motor

LedMot board
<

+12V A
R82
1 Black
15 ohms C
Enable lens motor

B
R83
2 White
15 ohms D

CLK lens motor 6

CS lens motor 4
CPLD 5
Direct lens motor 3

15 Lens sensor
+12V

17
LD 20
12

TP 18 <
Head_G Head motor
+12V A
R86
7 Black C
6.8 ohms
Enable head sensor

B
R87
8 White D
6.8 ohms
CLK head motor 19
CS head motor 10
CPLD 20
Direct head motor 9

16 Head sensor
+12V

18
LD 21
11
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

The Led mot board manages the motors of the lenses and LCD. These motors are stepper motors
that are driven by a CPLD circuit.
The lens sensor and head sensor boards allow to initialize the lens barrel and the LCD block.
Setting this sensors must be done in the SU mode (Zero calibration).

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 78 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

5.5. Sequencer board

5.5.1. Synoptic

Led Mot board

Sequencer board
Bus SPI

PC
Bus SPI Piezo board
LVDS HDMI
PCI type
connector FPGA SDRAM
board
8 Mb
(All informations) J12

+15.5V
Bus SPI

+5V

+15.5V +5V LCD driver board

The sequencer board manages the informations coming from the PCI board of the PC. Among these
informations are the images to be displayed on the LCD block. The FPGA decodes these informa-
tions and sends them through two 12-bits flows to the driver board.
This FPGA switches two tensions (+15.5V and +5V) that supply the driver board (management of
LCD block power supply).
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

The sequencer board also manages all the commands linked to the exposure.
The FPGA is not yet programmed when you switch on the machine. The firmware loads in the
FPGA when you launch the DKS3 software application or the Epson.exe diag (which is the test soft-
ware).

Note: no setting is required on this board.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 79

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

5.5.2. Power supply

FPGA

J3 < TP 10
NC J2
32 +18V
Filter 18V 8

42
+5V
9
< TP 3
NC
< TP 1
43 +5V NC
Filter +5V
Regulator 1 1.2V

< TP 5
NC
60 Regulator 2 2.5V CC Aux.

< TP 7
NC
Regulator 3 3.3V

Bdt
FPGA
80Mh
+5V Bdt J2
80Mh 51
FPGA

5.5.3. Board

Sequencer board synoptic

1.2V 3.3V 2.5V

B
B A
A N
N K
K
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7
4
B
A
N
SDRAM
HDMI
Cable 2
FGPA K

5 B 2.5V
A
PC 8
N
14
K
16
21 5
20
22
BANK 0 BANK 1 BANK 2 BANK 3
23

J4
J3 J2

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 80 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

5.6. Piezo board

5.6.1. Piezo principle and synoptic

Piezo
Y (5 µm)

X (5 µm) LCD Return spring in X

Piezo support

Return spring in Y
The displacement of one pixel on the paper corresponds to a displacement of a few µm on the LCD
block (approximately 5 µm).
Thus, the LCD block must be fixed onto a mobile support for the displacements in X/Y.
Two piezos are used to carry out accurate displacements.

Note: piezoelectricity is the ability of some materials to generate an electric potential in response to applied
mechanical stress. The reverse principle is used in the DKS3.
Tension is applied to the piezo terminals in order to make it move aside. The LCD block is reinitial-
ized by a return spring when there is no tension.

Led
Mot
board

Power

Power
J3 Piezo
board
Sequencer
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

board
Bus SPI ADC
+24V Switching
power supply
+5V 100V

Regulator T1 & T2
LCD heating
Temp
+15.5V Reg
CTN
J4 J5

X Y

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 81

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

The piezo board has several functions:

1. Its ADC (Analogic Digital Converter) receives informations from the FPGA of the sequencer
board via SPI bus in order to drive one piezo X and another one Y.
2. The temperature regulation of the LCD block is done by two transistors and one CTN of the
piezo board.
3. From 24V, it regulates the tension in 15.5V.
4. Switching power supply feeds both piezos.

Note: the piezo board should be adjusted.

Note: all positions of the piezo are saved in 'piezo.ini' file that is located in C:\DKS\Parametres

5.6.2. Power supply

TP 13 TP 2
J3
< <

20 +12V
5V regulator 5VA
<
TP 3
22

24
5V regulator 2.5VA
Fuse resistor
CTP 1

< TP 1

DC/DC converter 100V

< TP 14
26 24V
Regulator 16.68V (Driver board power supply)

LD 100
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 82 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

5.6.4. Piezo command in X

+100V

+100V

< TP 7
J2 VX

CLK piezzo
Cons X

SDI piezzo 12 bits N/A

+ TP 9
VXAD
J4
double <

CS_DAC_
converter
- 1

LD_DAC_PI X
3

12 bits N/A
converter
<
TP 8
VX7.5
2.5V

+5VA Regulator

+12V

The X piezo has three different positions for a x9 magnification and four different positions for a x16
magnification. These positions are determined by a software calculation. For this, the software refers
to a scanned target (designed for this). This calculation proposes four positions (for the x16 magnifi-
cation) and deduces three other positions (for the x9 magnification) from it (see Settings).
These positions are reached by supplying the piezo. This power supply can vary from 0V to 100V.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 83

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

5.6.5. Piezo command in Y

+100V

+100V

< TP 10
VY
J2
CLK piezzo
Cons Y

SDI piezzo 12 bits N/A

+ TP 12
VYAD
J5
double <

CS_DAC_
converter
- 1

LD_DAC_PI Y
3

12 bits N/A
converter
<
TP 11
VY7.5
2.5V

+5VA Regulator

+12V

The operating mode is the same one than for the piezo command in X.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 84 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

5.6.6. Temperature regulation

J8
<
TP 4
4
7

+12V 8
CTN
3

Temp.

LCD

1
A T1 T2

5
Regulation 6
comparator

2
A

DA SDO_Piezo
Converter

The LC block heating is made by two transistors of which the collector's surface is linked to the LCD
block's frame. Theoritically, the LCD block's frame is the heat sink of both transistors.
A CTN located in the block's frame provides information about its temperature. It can be visualized
thanks to the diagnosis software 'DiagEpson.exe'. This temperature is approximately 40 °C.

Note: this temperature cannot be set.

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

Note: when the temperature is not well regulated, a halo may appear on the prints.The same phenomenon
could also happen during the installation since the machine has not worked for several weeks.This disappears
within 2 or 3 days. Do not try to compensate by PRNU calculation.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 85

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

5.7. Epson driver board

5.7.1. Synoptic

Digital input
Driver Signal pro- DAC Analogic
cessing in output
real time
J6
11 11
SPI AD
FPGA 24
Converter
11 J1
DSP AD 24
Converter
LCD
11 11
AD
Epson.ini Converter

11
AD
Converter

Note: 'Epson.ini' is a file containing the LCD block settings. It is located in C:\DKS\Parametres.

The image of the LCD block is built thanks to a system scanning 24 pixels blocks line by line.
This driver board converts data coming from FPGA into video signal. For this, the DSP (Digital Signal
Processor) is a microprocessor optimized for calculation. It is used for the processing of digital signal
in real time.

The LCD is made up of two polarizers of which the polarization direction makes a 90 ° angle on
each side of a two glasses device retaining liquid crystals. The two internal sides of the glas plates
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

feature a transparent electrod matrix per pixel. Applying a potential difference between both electro-
des of a pixel changes the orientation of the molecules and thus a transparency variation of the whole
device.

Pixel electrodes can only be accessed by complete line or column and should be done by a regular
scanning.

Note: flicker, polarizer, magnification and response are characteristic of the LCD block. Other settings are
done in the SU mode.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 86 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

5.7.2. Power supply

Epson Driver Board Power Supply

TP 33
J6 <

LLCOM

< TP 36

V1 5V to 11.5V

SPI < TP 34

AD V2 5V to 11.5V
Converter
< TP 35

Vref2 4.5V to 14.5V

< TP 37

Vref2 4.5V to 14.5V

J6 < TP 10 < TP 1
1Ω 18V 15.5V
56
Regulator
55 DAC_Driver Board Power Supply
1Ω
54
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

53
FPGA
57 < TP 11 < TP 6
5V 3.3V
58 +5V
Filter Regulator
59 DAC_Driver Board Power Supply
DSP_Driver Board Power Supply
60
< TP 9
1.8V
Regulator
DSP_Driver Board Power Supply

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 87

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

5.8. Sharpness setting

5.8.1. Pre-required
• A Scoponet is required to carry out the first setting.
• Use the DiagEpson exe.
• The second setting (consisting in adjusting the trim) is made by deduction and assessment.

5.8.2. First setting

Quit the DKS application and launch the DiagEpson exe.

Note: since the DKS application was in use, the firmware of the sequencer board is still loaded in the board.
Then, the 'Epson.ini' and 'optique.ini' files should be reloaded in order to the DiagEpson exe. Nevertheless,
in case the DKS application was not launched, the firmware of the sequencer board should absolutely be
reloaded before reloading 'Epson.ini' and 'optique.ini'.

1. DiagEpson is operational., put the Scoponet at the center of the exposure plane.
2. Position the optics to be set.
3. Position the LCD block at 0°.
4. Switch the green led on.
5. Use the scoponet to appreciate each pixel at the center of the exposure plane. If the sharpness is
not correct, adjust the lens ring.

5.8.3. Second setting

Relaunch the DKS application and print the quality test targets in big format.

Reminder: the focusing point of each color on the paper is different.

Green Ideal focusing point

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

White Ideal paper position (no dominant color)

Red Ideal focusing point
Blue Ideal focusing point

If the focusing point is too high, a dominant green should appear on the black and white lines (maxi-
mal transition).
If the focusing point is too low, a dominant magenta should appear on the black and white lines.

See illustration on next page.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 88 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

Example

LCD screen

Lens

Y X

Adjusting screw

Dominant magenta Dominant green

Sharp

In the example above, you just need to tighten the right adjusting screw and loosen the left adjusting
screw to set the sharpness.

Important: if you adjust one of the screw (X or Y), do always check the center by using the Scoponet.

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 89

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

5.9. Changing parts

Before changing any of the following parts, follow the procedure below.

1. In your DKS application, make sure the STOP/GO button is red.

2. Quit the DKS application.
3. Shut PC and machine down.
4. Unplug the machine.
5. Open the exposure room door and remove three screws on top (see left picture below)
6. Remove three screws on the back of the machine (see right picture below).

7. Open the terminal receiver and remove the two screws (see
opposite picture).
8. Remove the upper cover.

Important: when handling the optical head S/A or any part of it, never touch the three leveling screws (see
pictures below) in order not to modify the leveling.

5.9.1. Changing the Led exposure head

1. Unplug the cordset from the Led exposure head (see next paragraph).
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

2. Unplug the black cable from the serial sequencer board (1 on left picture below).

3. Unplug the three Led harnesses from the Led exposure head.

4. Unscrew the three fixation T10 screws (see right picture below). Lift the exposure head and
remove it.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 90 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

4. Carry out these operations in the reverse order to reassemble it.

Note: do not forget to put the washers back in place before remounting the
exposure head (see opposite picture).The best thing to keep them in place is to
use a little bit of glue.
Note: check the uniformity of the prints (grey pattern in SU mode). If necessary,
redo the PRNU adjustment.

5.9.2. Changing the red Led S/A

1. Unplug the harness from the red Led S/A (see opposite picture).

2. Unscrew the two fixation screws from the red Led S/A (see
opposite picture).

3. Remove the red Led S/A and carry out these operations
in the reverse order to reassemble it.

Note: check the uniformity of the prints (grey pattern in SU mode). If necessary, redo the PRNU adjustment.

5.9.3. Changing the blue Led S/A

1. Remove the Led exposure head (see paragraph 5.4.1. Changing the Led exposure head) to access the
screws of the blue Led S/A.
2. Unscrew the two fixation screws from the blue Led S/A (see oppo-
site picture).
2. Remove the blue Led S/A and unplug the harness.

3. Carry out these operations in the reverse order to reassemble it.

Note: check the uniformity of the prints (grey pattern in SU mode). If necessary, redo the PRNU adjustment.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

5.9.4. Changing the green Led S/A

1. Unscrew the two fixation screws from the blue Led S/A (see opposite
picture).

2. Remove the green Led S/A and unplug the harness.

3. Carry out these operations in the reverse order to reassemble it.

Note: check the uniformity of the prints (grey pattern in SU mode). If necessary, redo the PRNU adjustment.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 91

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

5.9.5. Changing the photodiodes corset

1. Unplug the cordset from the Led exposure head (see left picture below).
2. Remove all the fixation rings from the cordset (see middle picture below).
3. Unplug the cordset from the board (see right picture below).
4. Change the cordset and carry out these operations in the reverse order to remount it.
5. Redo a Led calibration and check the PRNU (see Chapter 7: Settings).

5.9.6. Changing the optical head sensor board

1. Unplug the cordset from the Led exposure head (1 on opposite picture).
2. Remove the three screws maintaining the plastic protection plate (2 on op-
posite picture).
3. Remove the protection plate.
4. On the back side of the protection plate, unscrew the two fixation screws of the optical head sen-
sor board.
5. Change the board and carry out these operations in the reverse order to reassemble the system.
6. Redo a Led calibration and check the PRNU (see Settings).

5.9.7. Changing the LCD unit rotation belt

1. Remove the Led exposure head S/A (see paragraph 5.4.1.

Changing the Led exposure head).
1
2. Disconnect the harness (1 on opposite picture) and the black
cable (2 on opposite picture from their respective boards. 2
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

3. Remove the spring (1 on opposite picture), then loosen the four

screws maintaining the motor so that you can move it and loosen
the belt tension (2 on opposite picture).
2

1
4. Change the belt and carry out these operations in the reverse order to reassemble the system.

5. Adjust the LCD unit rotation belt's zero sensor (see Settings) and check
the LCD offset.

Note: when remounting the belt make sure the tooth is well inserted into a
notch of the pulley (see opposite picture).

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 92 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

5.9.8. Changing the lens barrel belt

1. Open the exposure room.

2. Remove the spring (1 on opposite picture), then loosen the four 3

screws maintaining the motor so that you can move it and loosen
the belt tension (2 on opposite picture).
3. Fold the protection (3 on opposite picture), remove the belt,
change it and carry out these operations in the reverse order to
reassemble the system.
4. Adjust the barrel zero sensor (see Settings) and check lens offset.
1 2

5.9.9. Changing the LCD unit rotation motor

Note: open the exposure room before carrying out these operations.

1. Disconnect the motor (1 on left picture below).

2. Remove the spring (2 on left picture below), then unscrew the four screws (3 on left picture be-
low) to remove the motor through the exposure room.

Note: hold the motor (see right picture below for location) through the exposure room while you unscrew the
four screws to avoid the motor to fall on the exposure plan and to damage it.
2 3

1
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

3. Carry out these operations in the reverse order to reassemble the system.

4. Adjust the LCD unit rotation's zero sensor (see Settings).

Note: when remounting the motor and thus retightening the belt make sure the tooth is well inserted into a
notch of the pulley (see paragraph Changing the Piezo belt).

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 93

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

5.9.10. Changing the lens barrel motor

1. Open the exposure room.

2. In the exposure room, remove the spring (1 on left picture below), then unscrew the four screws
(2 on left picture below) to remove the motor through the exposure room.
3. Remove the plastic protection of the wires (3 on right picture below), disconnect the motor (4 on
right picture below and remove the motor from the optical head S/A (5 on right picture below) .
4 3

2 5

1
4. Carry out these operations in the reverse order to reassemble the system.
5. Adjust the barrel's zero sensor (see Settings).

5.9.11. Changing the serial sequencer board

1. Unplug the black cable from the serial sequencer board (1 on left picture below).
2. Remove two screws (2 on left picture below) in order to access the serial sequencer board on
the back side.
3. Remove three screws on the board (3 on right picture below).

1
3
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

2
3. Change the board and carry out these operations in the reverse order to reassemble the system.

Note: no setting is necessary.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 94 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

5.9.12. Changing the Epson driver HD board

2
1. Unplug the ribbon cable from the serial sequencer board
(1 on opposite picture).

Note: be careful because the connector is fragile!!!

2. Remove the three screws from the board (2 on left picture
below). 1
3. Change the board and carry out these operations in the reverse order to reassemble the system.
4. Adjust the sharpness (see Sharpness setting in this chapter), the flicker, the polarizer, the gain, the
paper calibration, the PRNU, the piezo and the centering (see Chapter 7: Settings).

5.9.13. Changing the Piezo board

1. Unplug the ribbon cable from the LCD Temp Piezo board (1 on left picture below) and unscrew
the two screws of the cable ribbon's blocking element (right picture below).

Note: when remounting the board, do not tighten the blocking element too much not to damage it!!!

2. Remove the four screws from the board (2 on left picture below).
3. Change the board and carry out these operations in the reverse order to reassemble the system.
1

4. Check the LCD temperature with DiagEpson.exe (40 °C + 3).

5. Check the piezo adjustment (see Settings). If necessary, readjust it.

5.9.14. Changing the LCD block S/A

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

1. Remove the exposure head (see paragraph Changing the exposure head before).
2. Unplug the ribbon cable from the serial sequencer board (1
on opposite picture). Locks are on both sides of connector.

Note: be careful because the connector is fragile!!!

1
3. Unplug the black harness from the serial sequencer board (2
on opposite picture). 2
4. Unscrew two Torx T10 screws (3 on opposite picture) and two
bevelled Torx T10 screws (4 on opposite pictures) to remove the 3 4
LCD block.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 95

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

5. Carry out these operations in the reverse order to reassemble the system.

6. Adjust the sharpness (see Sharpness setting in this chapter), the flicker, the polarizer, the gain, the
paper calibration, the PRNU, the piezo and the centering (see Chapter 7: Settings).

Note: the two bevelled screws allow to position the LCD block correctly on the piezo support when remount-
ing it.

5.9.15. Changing the Heating LCD harness (including resistors and probe)
2
1. Remove the LCD block S/A (see previous paragraph).
Note: handle the LCD block with care because it is very 1
fragile.
2. Under the LCD block, unscrew two Torx T10 screws (1 and 2 on
opposite picture) to remove the heating LCD harness and its resis-
tors.
3
3. Carry out these operations in the reverse order to reassemble the
system.

Note: correctly insert the probe in the dedicated hole (3 on picture above) when remounting the harness.

Note: do not forget to reinstall the plastic isolation parts.

5.9.16. Changing the Piezo plate S/A

1. Remove the exposure head (see paragraph Changing the exposure head before).
2. Unscrew the two Torx T10 screws of the cable ribbon's blocking element (left picture below) to
remove it.
3. Disconnect the black cable from the optical board (1 on right picture below) and then the ribbon
cable from the piezo board (2 on right picture below).

1
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

4. Unscrew four Torx T20 screws left picture below and remove the piezo support S/A (middle and
right pictures below).

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 96 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

5. Remove the boards by unscrewing 2 Torx T20 screws (see right picture below).
6. Carry out these operations in the reverse order to reassemble the system.
7. Set the sharpness (see Sharpness setting in this chapter and Settings).
8. Redo all the settings of the LCD block.

Note: when remounting the board, do not tighten the blocking element too much not to damage it!!!

5.9.17. Changing the piezos

1. Remove the piezo support (see paragraph Changing the Piezo support S/A before).

2. Unscrew two screws (opposite picture).

3. Remove the piezo (see opposite picture).

4. Carry out these operations in the reverse order to reassemble the system.

Note: when remounting the piezos, make sure that the spacings (white
circles on opposite picture) are all the same.

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

5. Adjust the sharpness (see Sharpness setting in this chapter), the piezo and the centering (see Chap-
ter 7: Settings).

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 97

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 98 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

6. Back printer module

6.1. Full presentation of the back printer module

6.1.1. Paper Advance

The paper advance function is made in two steps:

1) Transfer of the paper when going out from the exposure plan in front of the printer to-
ward the second part of the printer module.
2) Transfer of the paper from the first part of the module printer for introduction into the
tank of chemical processing.

The paper advance in this module is made by two sets of loose rollers driven by two pinion belts and
two step motors.
Three claps allow the access for the removal of paper or the cleaning of the driving rollers and the
setting of anvils.
Two sets of cells allow to control the paper when it is passing through. One set is positioned up the
printer and the other one is positioned up the tank.

Paper out

Stepper motor
(introduction of
photos in the
tank)

Two tracks prin-

ter (on the back)

Paper detection
cell boards Anvils
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

Printer stepper
motor

Paper in

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 99

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

6.1.2. Back Printing

The back printing is carried out by a printer equipped with two heads (each 7 printing pins) and
with an advance system of the ink ribbon (with a direct current motor with reducer). An anvil (fa-
cing each printer head) allows a good hit of the needles on the the ink ribbon for a good transfer
of the ink on the paper.

Ink ribbon
advance
motor

Printer
heads

6.2. Mechanical adjustments of the printer module

6.2.1. Tension of the belts

The adjustment of the belts is done by moving of the stepper motor.

Loosen the 3 screws that maintain the step motor. The motor is moved by the spring so that it
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

ensures a good tension of the belt. Retighten the three screws.

Screws maintaining the motor

Move the motor three times up and

down so that it finds its right adjust-
ment!
Tension spring

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 100 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

6.2.2. Anvil rods adjustment

Tighten or loosen the screws to adjust the anvil rods.

Screw of anvil rod adjustment

Anvil rod of front track

Let 2 photos (one over each another) go opposite each anvil; thighten the nut until the passing of the
paper becomes slightly more difficult.
Once done, check the print. No ink mark should be found on the photo's length.
The text should be "uniform" and vivid enough to be seen.
If the text is too clear, it means that the anvils are too loosened.
If the text is too dark, then the anvils are too tightened.

6.3. Cycles
Cell 2 (Phd3)
Once the paper has been exposed, it is then sent to the
back printer (located in the red dotted frame on the
opposite picture) where some data about the photo is
printed on the side of the photo which has not been Paper Out
exposed.
When the paper is in the printer, cell 1 detects its pre-
sence, makes the photo advance step by step and laun-
ches the back printing. Cell 2 detects when the photo is
sent to the chemicals tank.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

Note: also see diagrams of next pages.

Cell 1
(PhdImp)

Paper In

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 101

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

6.3.1. Back printing

Waiting for photos

Exposure plan started photo transfert

Wait Imp Printer Motor Run High

Sensor Zone Speed

Photo should be in sensor zone &

photo detected
Photo should be in sensor Zone
& photo not detected

Waiting for PhdImp Printer Motor Run High

Photo detected too early on PhdImp Error
Sensor Speed

Photo should be out of sensor zone &

photo not detected
Photo detected

Waiting for printing Printer Motor Run High

Photo missing on PhdImp Error
zone Speed

Photo in printing zone

Legend of text Legend of links

Printer Motor Run at

Black text in frame: Status Arrows: Possible paths Printing Printing
printing speed

Red Text: User action Bold arrows: Ideal path

Photo printed
Blue text: Physical event Dotted lines: Status/events associations

Green text: Non-physical event

Waiting transfer Printer Motor Run High
zone Speed

Photo in transfer zone

IntroCuve Module

Waiting next
Printer Motor Stop
module
Transfer
zone

Next Module Ready

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

Printer Motor Run High

Transfer
Speed
Printer

BackPrint Module Photo is out

PhdImp

Sensor zone
Stop Printer Motor Stop

Transfer
zone

Exposure plane module

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 102 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

6.3.2. Tank introduction

Legend of text Legend of links

Black text in frame: Status Arrows: Possible paths Waitting for photos

Red Text: User action Bold arrows: Ideal path

BackPrint module started photo transfer

Blue text: Physical event Dotted lines: Status/events associations

Wait phd 3 IntroCuve Motor Run High
Green text: Non-physical event Sensor Zone Speed

Photo should be in sensor zone &

photo detected
Photo should be in sensor Zone
& photo not detected

Waiting for Phd3 IntroCuve Motor Run High

Photo detected too early on PhdImp Error
Sensor Speed

Photo should be out of the sensor zone &

photo not detected
Photo detected

Waiting for non- IntroCuve Motor Run High

Photo missing on PhdImp Error
overlapping zone Speed

Photo in non-overlapping zone &

last photo not advanced enough

Photo in non-overlapping zone & last photo advanced enough

IntroCuve Motor Run High

Waiting Non-overlapping
speed

Last photo advanced enough

Photo out of non-overlapping zone or last photo just advanced enough

Sensor zone
IntroCuve Motor Run at
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

Transfer
RackSpeed

Phd3
Photo out

Non-
overlapping
zone

Stop IntroCuve Motor Stop

Transfer
zone
Tank Intro Module
Rack Module

Transfer
zone

Back Printer Module

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 103

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

6.4. Electronic drawings

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

tors block
box resis-
Electrical

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 104 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 105

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

6.5. Exposure plane board

6.5.1. Board drawing

2 1
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 106 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

6.5.2. Additional information

Printer

Stepper motor
Motor TP 9(V) Winding Max
Current (A)
Stopped 4.5 0.41
Working 24 2.25

Paper detection double detector board 060 310 838

Paper LD5 TP59 LD6 TP58
Present ON 0 ON 0
Absent OFF 12V OFF 12V

The Leds and test points of the table above are located by 1 on the previous page's board drawing.

Introduction into tank

Stepper motor (introduction into tank)

Motor TP 9(V) Winding Max
Current (A)
Stopped 4.5 0.41
Working 24 2.25

Paper detection double detector board 060 310 838

Paper LD13 TP60 LD14 TP61
Present ON 0 ON 0
Absent OFF 12V OFF 12V

The Leds and test points of the table above are located by 2 on the previous page's board drawing.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 107

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

6.6. Changing components

6.6.1. Putting off the printer module

1. In your DKS application, make sure the STOP/GO button is red.

2. Quit the DKS application.
3. Shut the PC and the machine down.
4. Unplug the machine.
5. Open the exposure room.
6. Pull the knob (red arrow on left picture below) to take
out the printer drawer from the exposure room (black
arrow on opposite picture).

7. Slightly loosen the four Torx T30 screws of the module (red arrows on right pictures above).
8. Lift the module and and pull it towards you.

6.5.2. Changing the loose rollers

1. Open the trapdoor corresponding to the roller to be changed.
2. Make the spring pass over the roller on both sides (see oppo-
site pictures).

3. Insert a flat screwdriver in the bearing (1 on opposite picture)

in order to open it and use a second screwdriver (2 on picture) to
push the bearing (black arrow on picture).
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

4. Repeat this operation on the second washer on the other side of

1
the roller.

5. Remove the roller and change it (picture below).

Note: do not forget to put the pressure springs back in place when reassembling the
roller and ensure they are tightly clip on.

Note: ensure the roller can rotate freely.

Note: make print trials to make sure you correctly replaced the roller.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 108 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

6.6.3. Changing the printing anvil

1. Open the middle trapdoor. Printing anvil

3. Change the anvil plate (black arrow on picture).

Note: after having replaced the anvil, ensure that

sheetmetals are not bend out of shape.

Note: after having replaced the anvil, adjust it (see paragraph 6.2.2. Anvil rods adjustment before).

6.6.4. Changing the motor rollers

1. Remove the belt (see next paragraph Changing the belt and the
motor).
2. Pull the ball bearing support downwards (see opposite picture)
and remove it.

3. On the printer's opposite flange, give a sharp hammer blow

on the shaft to remove the ball bearings from the flanges (oppo-
site picture).

4. Remove the pulley by using a 2 BTR wrench and remove

the roller through the inside (see picture below).

Note: when you put the roller back in place, ensure that the ball bearing and the
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

roller rotate freely.

Note: when you put the belt back in place, make sure to place it correctly (see picture below).

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 109

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

6.6.5. Changing the belt and the motor

1. Loosen the 3 Torx T20 screws (arrows on opposite picture).

2. Push the motor towards the right (yellow arrow on opposite picture to
loosen the belt .

3. Remove the belt.

4. Remove the spring (see opposite picture).

5. Remove the pulley by using a 2 BTR wrench.

6. Unplug the motor (see opposite picture).

7. Totally remove the 3 Torx T20 screws.
8. Take the motor out.
9. Possibly, you can retrieve the pulley (by using a 2 BTR wrench) and
the spring support from the motor.

Note: when you put the belt back in place, make sure to place it correctly (see picture below).

6.6.6. Changing the second motor

This second motor is the stepper motor that introduces the pictures in the tank.
Follow the procedure described in the previous paragraph (6.5.4. Changing the printer motor).
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

6.6.7. Changing the cells

Just mind the way you put back the washers when reinstalling (see diagram below).
The wide part of the spacer is placed right against the PC board.

Board
Washer
Support

Wrong

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 110 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

6.6.8. Installing back the module

Put the back printer module back with the four screws.

6.6.9. Adjusting the height of the back printer

By playing with the two upper screws, you can adjust the height of the back
printer module (see opposite picture).

Note: the height of the back printer module is correctly adjusted when the pictures
enter properly in the racks (see both pictures below).

Picture goes
out of the
back printer
module Picture enters racks

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 111

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 112 060 311 714 B 12/2007

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7. Tank
7.1. Heating
7.1.1. Heating presentation
See also the Chemistry paragraph of section 2, Operating requirements and principles.

Principle view of tank

(references allow you to locate elements in the electrical diagrams of the next pages).

220V power

PCB card (A)

Level detector (B)

Level detector (C)
Heating
resistance
(D)

Filter

Sensors (E)

Circulation
pump (F)

Pump motor (G)

220V power

The tank PCB (A) reads the chemical temperature of each bath thanks to the sensors (E): see the
electronic drawing in 7.1.3.1.Temperature regulation.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

If the chemistry temperature is lower than the defined settings, the PCB starts the heater (D).
When the temperature reaches the settings, the PCB stops the heater.
In order to get an homogeneous temperature in the baths, we also use a circulation pump (F) driven
by a motor (G): see the electronic drawing in 7.1.3.2. Circulation pumps.
Note that this pump is also used to filter the chemistry to remove different particles as goudron,
souffer, argentic deposits, etc...

Note: the circulation pump always works when the DKS application is started on the PC if no security switch
is activated.
Level detectors (B and C) allow to switch off the heating in case the bottom sensor (B) is not in
contact with the chemistry, avoiding to burn anything in the tank: see the electronic drawing in 7.1.3.3.
Level detection.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 113

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.1.2. Level detection

7.1.2.1. Presentation

Each of the 5 baths of the tank is monitored by a double level detection system:
• 'high' default level;
• 'low' critical level.

Tank
PCB card

High default level probe Ground pin

Low critical level

15 mm detector

In case of high level default in a tank, the tank board activates the corresponding replenishment
(chemicals and water) pumps to top up the levels (a maximum of 20 rpm is done before stopping: an
alert message is then sent).

In case of 'low' critical level, the tank board considers that the tank is empty (even if it is not the case)
and stops the 220V thanks to its static relay.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 114 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.1.2.2. Principle of liquid level detection

When the level is high, the A point When the level is low, the A point
is connected to the ground via the is not connected to the ground. Its
chemistry. Its potential is then 0V. potential is then 5V.

The tank board reads the voltage on the A point for every level detection, and thanks to the voltage
read on this point it knows if the level is OK or not.

Note: there is no Led on the tank board that shows which detector is on default level.
If there is a default level on any of the critical level detectors, the Led 4 of the tank board lights up,
the Led 20 lights off and stops controlling the 20v relay.

7.1.2.3. Additional information

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

TP30: permanent presence of +5V pulses sent to electrodes via resistors.

Tank board 060 310 896

Liquid High Electrode Low Electrode
LD4 Indication
Level Voltage Voltage
High OFF 0 0 Level OK 1
Medium OFF +5V Pulse 0 Low level 2
Low ON +5V Pulse +5V Pulse Too low

1: Replenishment pumps command

2: Circulating pump and tank heating stopped.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 115

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.1.2.4. Electronic drawing

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 116 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.1.3. Bath temperature measuring

7.1.3.1. Principle

The three temperature sensors are connected to the tank board so that it can
know the temperature of each bath.

There are two temperature sensors per sensor. The first one measures temperature at the top of
the tank, while the second one measures it at the bottom of the tank. In case the temperature's diffe-
rence is positive ([Top Temp x 0.5] - [Bottom Temp x 0.55]), it means there is no more bath agitation.
An error message appears on the screen.

7.1.3.2. Electronic drawing

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 117

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.1.3.3. Additional information

Liquid Temperature Sensor response: Tank board 060 310 896

Temperature (°C) 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42
Sensor Resistance
12.5 11.4 10.4 9.6 8.8 8.1 7.4 6.8 6.3 5.8 5.3 4.9
(Kohm)
Voltage (Volts) on
TP 21 22 23 24 2 2.15 2.3 2.45 2.62 2.81 3.01 3.22 3.45 3.7 3.96 4.24
25 27
TP 21: test point of high level sensor of developer bath
TP 22: test point of low level sensor of developer bath
TP 23: test point of high level sensor of stabilizer bath
TP 24: test point of low level sensor of stabilizer bath
TP 25: test point of high level sensor of bleach bath
TP 27: test point of low level sensor of bleach bath

Note: refer to the board plan on next page to locate the different test points and Leds.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 118 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.1.3.4. Tank board plan

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 119

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.1.3.4. Changing the bath temperature sensors

1. Turn the machine off and unplug it.

2. Remove the right side panel.
3. Lift out the dryer.
4. Remove the cover from the semi-watertight tank.
5. Unscrew and remove the cover from the maintenance chan-
nel.
6. Unclip the connections from the relevant sensors.
7. Cut the linking cables.
8. Unscrew the cross-headed screw from the sensor con-
cerned.
9. Remove the temperature sensor, pulling it from above.
10. Remove the bath rack.
11. Empty the tank.
12. Remove the bulkhead.
13. Replace the sensor (it should be placed in the notch at the
bottom of the tank as on the opposite picture).

Note: once the sensors reassembled, check the bath temperature and adjust it if necessary.

Note: if required, correct the temperature offset in the SU (see the Settings section of this manual and the
Super User section of the User Manual (KIS ref.: 060 311 711).

7.1.4. Bath heating

Each tank is equipped with its own 220V heating element in order to warm up the chemistry.

1. In the developer bath, there is one 300W heater driven by the tank board. When the heater is on,
the tank board's Led 5 is on.
2. In the bleach bath, there is one 300W heater driven by the tank board. When the heater is on, the
tank board's Led 6 is on.
3. In each of the three stabilizer baths, there is one 200W heater per stabilizer tank driven by the
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

tank board, but there is only one sensor in the first bath. This sensor measures the temperature of
the first stabilizer bath which is then used by the tank board to drive all three stabilizer heating ele-
ments. When the heater is on, the tank board's Led 7 is on.

Note: all heaters are protected by fuse F1 on the tank board and by fuse F2 that is close to the main power supply
button of the machine. If one of these fuses is burnt out, or if the static relay is off, they will not heat up.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 120 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.1.5. Temperature regulation

7.1.5.1. Principle
The tank board regulates the temperature of each tank according to the settings stored in the
memory of the tank board processor and the current temperature in the tanks.
These settings depend on the data entered in 'chimie.exe'.

Chimie.exe

Step 1 Chimie.ini
NOM=ChimieSP20EM_HQ_DKS3

Chimie A ChimieSP20EM_LR_DKS3 Chimie C

[TEMPERATURE]

TWUrev=39.7 Step 2
TWUStab=35
TWUBf=37
Tank PCB Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

Step 1:
Updating 'chimie.ini' and choosen chemistry file when clicking on 'Save parameters' (red dotted frame
on picture above) in 'Chimie.exe'.

Step 2:
Data transferred in tank board when DKS application is started.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 121

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.1.5.2. Electronic drawing

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 122 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.1.5.3. Tank board

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 123

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.1.5.4. Additional information

Note: refer to the board plan on previous page to locate the different test points and Leds.

Developer heating : Tank board 060 310 896

Temperature Limit Main Stat Relay Heater
LD5 TP22 T° Dev TP93 LD20 Dev
ON <4,5V <43,2°C 0 ON ON
OFF X X X X OFF
X >4,5V >43,2°C X X OFF
X X X >4V OFF OFF
V(TP21)=V(TP22)==> Normal working
V(TP21) > V(TP22)==> Dev Circulating Pump pb

Bleach heating: Tank board 060 310 896

Temperature Limit Main Stat Relay Heater
LD6 TP24 T° Bleach TP93 LD20 Bleach
ON <4,5V <43,2°C 0 ON ON
OFF X X X X OFF
X >4,5V >43,2°C X X OFF
X X X >4V OFF OFF
V(TP23)=V(TP24)==> Normal working
V(TP23) > V(TP24)==> Bleach Circulating Pump pb

Stab heating: Tank board 060 310 896

Temperature Limit Main Stat Relay Heater
LD7 TP27 T° Stab TP93 LD20 Stab
ON <4,5V <43,2°C 0 ON ON
OFF X X X X OFF
X >4,5V >43,2°C X X OFF
X X X >4V OFF OFF
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

V(TP25)=V(TP27)==> Normal working

V(TP25) > V(TP27==> Stab Circulating Pump pb

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 124 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.1.5.5. Changing the heaters

1. Shut the machine down and unplug it.

2. Remove the right rear panel.
3. Remove the right side panel.
4. Remove the transparent cover in front of the heating ele-
ment connector bar of the heating elements.
5. Disconnect the cable from the element concerned (discon-
nect from electrical box, attach any piece of wire to the old
cable so that you can use it to pull the new.
6. Take off the cover from the semi-watertight tank.
7. Remove the cover from the heating element cable channel.
8. Remove the cover from the maintenance channel.
3. Remove the rilsan collars.
10. Remove the heating element.
11. For reassembly, carry out these operations in the reverse
order.

Note: ensure that the heating element cable goes through the hook
and that a collar is fitted at both ends.

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 125

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.1.6. Circulation pumps

7.1.6.1. Principle

There is a circulation pump (A on picture below) in each bath of the tank. This pump has two func-
tions:

1. carrying out a circulation in the bath to get an homogeneous temperature (regulated by the
heater: D on picture below);
2. filtering (E on picture below) the chemistry to remove different particles as goudron, souffer,
argentic deposits, etc...

B
C

Warning: circulation pump motors (B on picture above) are very sensitive to the actual voltage (C on picture
above). In case of low 220V (208V for instance, like in the USA), please install and connect the auto-transformer
(see Chapter 3 - Installation Instructions in this manual).

7.1.6.2. Troubleshooting
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

Check the following points in case the pumps are not turning.
1. General circuit breaker should be ON.
2. Fuse F2 should be OK.
3. General static relay (the one of the left) should be ON, meaning that LED20 is ON on the
tank board and that the DKS application is running.
4. Fuse F1 of the tank board is OK.
5. Auto-transformer is on place (not mandatory if power is < 220V: see Chapter 3: Installation
Instructions).
6. Static relay RS4 should be ON, meaning that LED8 is ON.
7. Check that the turbine is not blocked.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 126 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.1.6.3. Electronic drawing

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 127

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.1.6.4. Changing the circulation pumps

1. In your DKS application, make sure the STOP/GO button is red.

2. Quit the DKS application.
3. Shut your PC and the machine down.
4. Unplug the machine.
5. Open the dryer unit.
6. Remove the rear panel.
7. Disconnect the tank sensors (1 on left picture below) and remove the three replenishment tanks
(2 on left picture below).
8. Lift down the tank support.
9. Empty the tank concerned.
10. Remove the rack concerned.
11. Remove the metal cover by unscrewing two screws (3 on left picture below).
12. Free the retaining clips (see right picture below) and the insulating ring from the pump motor.
13. Unscrew the pump screw.
14. Free the pump sub-assembly from the inside of the tank.
15. To refit the pump, carry out these operations in the reverse order, ensuring that the pump body is
in the correct position.

3 1

Note: ensure that the pump works correctly after complete reassembly and introduction of water or chemicals.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

When the pump turns, a slight vibration can be felt in the filter holder.

Note: the pump is active when there is a 230V supply to the tank, the orange indicator light next to the master
switch is lit. There is a 230V supply to the tank when the low level is reached in the machine bath tanks, and
there is no overheating.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 128 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.2. Replenishment

7.2.1. Replenishment principle

When processing paper, picture after picture, the chemistry quality of each bath (Developer, Bleach
Fix and Stabilizer) decreases.
New chemistry should then be added proportionally to the paper quantity processed. This propor-
tion corresponds to the "Replenishment rate”.

Replenishment
pump

Water pump

Pressure
switch

Full level
Water tank
sensor
Waste tank

Empty level
Chemistry replenishment
switch
tank

• The machine works with concentrated chemistry.

When the machine needs to send fresh chemistry into a tank, it pumps at the concerned concentrat-
ed liquid and the water at the same time in order to dilute the concentrated product.
• The DKS application that runs on the machine's PC calculates the number of both chemistry and
water pump turns according to the quantity developed photo paper and according to the chemistry/
water ratio and the replenishment rate entered in chimie.exe.
The DKS application then requests to the tank board to do:
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

- X pump turns for the concentrated chemistry

- Y pump turns for the water.

Note: the tank board does not calculate the number of pump turns, it only runs the pumps.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 129

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.2.1.1. Management of developed paper counter

The quantity of replenishment chemistry sent into each tank is proportional to the printed paper
surface.
As one goes along the DKS application prints paper, it keeps in memory the quantity of developed
paper as well as the quantity of replenishment chemistry sent (pumps turns).
Those informations are written in the 'Chimie.var' file every three minutes in order not to multiply
the disk accesses and not to slow down the machine.
If 17M² have been done since the morning, the counter shows at the t-time :
M2_JOURNALIERS=17

Note: JOURNALIERS is the French word for DAILY and M² the quantity of developed paper.

3 minutes later, the DKS application adds what has been done since then.
For instance, if 2 M² of paper have been developed in the previous 3 minutes, the DKS application
updates the 'Chimie.var' files as follows:
M2_JOURNALIERS=17+2 = 19

3 minutes later again, the DKS application adds what has been done since then (for instance +1M²):
M2_JOURNALIERS=19+1 = 20

7.2.1.2. Management of required chemistry quantity according to paper quantity

The replenishment rate shows the quantities of the different products to send into each tank (the
measure is done in milliliters per printed square meter).
Those informations can be visualized with 'Chimie.exe' which actually reads them in the '.ini' files of
the type of chemistry used:

ChimieSP20EM_HQ_DKS3.ini

[CHIMIE]
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

TEMPS_REV=20
CST_FILE=ChimieSP20EM_LR_DKS3.cst
CTO=0
CORRECTION_FACTOR=EKTACOLOR RA-2SM
[TAUX_ENTRETIEN]
Txrev=108
Txbf=108
Txstab=388

Note: this factor is required if you

are using the external densitometer
functionality.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 130 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

Besides, 'chimie.exe' also provides dilution informations (concentrated/water rate) for each product.
Those informations are written in the '.ini' file of the type of chemistry used:

ChimieSP20EM_HQ_DKS3.ini

[BAIN_Rev0]
POMPE=0
POURCENT=0.100000
LIBELLE=Rev
VOLUME=2000
PRESOSTAT=ENTREE_EMBARQUE_PRESSOSTAT_ POMPE_1
[BAIN_Rev1]
POMPE=1
POURCENT=0.900000
LIBELLE=EauRev
VOLUME=21500

The result displayed above means that the replenishment is done with 10% of concentrated devel-
oper and 90% of water.

7.2.1.3. Replenishment quantities

Example with the developer (Bleach and Stabilizer use the same principle).

For the developer, the replenishment rate read in 'ChimieSP20EM_HQ_DKS3.ini' (current chemistry
registered in 'chimie.ini') is 108ml / M²
[TAUX_ENTRETIEN]
Txrev=108

Note: TAUX is the French word for RATE and ENTRETIEN the French word for REPLENISHMENT.

The DKS application reads the number of developed paper square meters:
M2_JOURNALIERS=19+1 = 20
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

Then, 20 times 108 ml of diluted developer are required: that is to say 2160 ml

For the developer, the dilution rate read in 'ChimieSP20EM_HQ_DKS3.ini' is:

[BAIN_Rev0]
POMPE=0
POURCENT=0.100000
[BAIN_Rev1]
POMPE=1
POURCENT=0.900000

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 131

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

Then, for 20M² the following quantities are needed:

Developer: 2160*0.1= 216 ml

Developer water: 2160*0.9= 1944 ml

7.2.1.4. How to pump a precise quantity of product?

The DKS application knows the precise quantity pumped by each pump at each turn.
This information is written in the 'Chimie.ini' file as follows:

[CHIMIE] Note: these flow informations are updated by

NOM=ChimieSP20EM_HQ_DKS3 the DKS application during the calibration of the
TREV_FREQUENCY_FACTOR=3600 pumps in the SU.
[DEBITS]
DEBIT_1_TOUR_P0=2.975000
DEBIT_1_TOUR_P1=9.900000 Note: DEBIT is the French word for FLOW and
DEBIT_1_TOUR_P2=10.000000 TOUR the French word for TURN.
DEBIT_1_TOUR_P3=3.050000
DEBIT_1_TOUR_P4=3.100000
DEBIT_1_TOUR_P5=9.900000
DEBIT_1_TOUR_P7=3

At each pump turn, the developer pump sends 3ml.

To obtain 216 ml of developer, 216/2, 975=72,605 pump turns are required.

At each pump turn, the developer water pump sends 9.9ml.

To obtain 1944 ml of water, 1944/9.9=196.36 pump turns are required.

7.2.1.5. Previous replenishment

For the previous replenishment, 19M² of paper had already been developed. Then, the machine al-
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

ready pumped the desired chemistry like described below:

19X108=2052 ml of diluted developer, among them:

2 052 X0.1 = 205.20 of developer replenishment

2052 X0.9 = 1846.80 of water

The resulting pump turns are:

205,20 / 2,975 = 68,97 developer pump turns

1846,8 / 9,9 = 186,54 water pumps turns

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 132 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

Thus, the machine pumped 68 developer turns and 186 water turns. These informations are saved in
'Chimie.var' as well as the M² number:

[VARIABLES]
NB_TOUR_JOURNALIER_P0=68
NB_TOUR_DEFAUT_JOURNALIER_P0=0
NB_TOUR_JOURNALIER_P1=186
NB_TOUR_DEFAUT_JOURNALIER_P1=0

M2_JOURNALIERS=19

7.2.1.6. Replenishment in progress

A total of 20M² developed has been reached for now, what is now required is:

20 X 108=2160 ml of diluted developer, among them:

2160 X0.1 = 216.00 of concentrated developer and 2160 X0.9 = 1944.00 of water

The resulting pump turns are:

216 / 2,975 = 72,60 developer pump turns and 1944 / 9,9 =196,36 water pump turns.

72 developer pump turns and 196 water pump turns.

It already pumped:
68 developer pump turns and 186 water pump turns.

Then, it must pump now:

4 developer pump turns and 10 water pump turns.

The PC sends a request to the tank board via the CAN bus in order to pump 4 and 10 turns.

7.2.1.7. Other informations

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

Every 3 minutes, the DKS application also writes in the 'Chimie.var' file the quantities of concentrated
chemistry and water that were actually sent:

Chimie.var:
[VARIABLES]
BAIN_REV0=9.000000
BAIN_REV1=89.100000

Note: BAIN is the French sword for BATH.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 133

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

The DKS application also knows the total quantity of the replenishmant tank that can be viewed with
'Chimie.exe' and saved in the corresponding 'ChimieXXX.ini' file.
For instance, the volume of the developer replenishment tank of the chemistry SP20EM_HQ is 2
liters:

ChimieSP20EM_HQ_DKS3.ini:
[BAIN_Rev0]
LIBELLE=Rev
VOLUME=2000

Thanks to those two informations, the DKS application displays on the screen the percentage still

It is the same for the effluents with the

following informations since the volume
of the tank remains constant. If you in-
ject a replenishment volume V1 into the
tank, the same V1 volume is evacuated
from the tank to the effluent cans:

Chimie.var :
[VARIABLES]
BAIN_REV0=9.000000
BAIN_REV1=89.100000
VOL_EFFL_REV=98.100000

ChimieSP20EM_HQ_DKS3.ini:
[EFFLUENTS]
LimEfflrev=80
LimEfflBf=80
LimEfflStab=80
ContEfflrev=4200
ContEfflBf=2700
ContEfflStab=11000
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 134 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.2.2. Replenishment pumps

The working conditions of the replenishment pumps are:

1. General circuit breaker should be ON.

2. Fuse F2 should be OK.
3. General static relay (the left one) should be ON, meaning that LED20 is ON on the
tank board and that the DKS application is running.
4. Fuse F1 of the tank board is OK.
5. Auto-transformer is on place (for the USA).
6. Static relay RS4 should be ON, meaning that LED8 is ON.
7. Check that the turbine is not blocked.

7 5 3 1
Pump Use Corresponding
number LED ON

1 Not used LD9

2 Stabilizer LD10
3 Water / Stabilizer LD11
4 Bleach Fix LD15
5 Water / Bleach Fix LD13
6 Developper LD14
7 Water / Developper LD30
8 CTO LD29
8 6 4 2

Note: see further electronic diagram to locate the LEDs and their corresponding sensors.

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 135

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.2.3. Replenishment cycle

INIT

Nb_Pump_Turns_to_do > Nb_Pump_Turns_done

Power Supply of Pump

PUMP MOTOR START
Motor

No detection of back edge of pump Detection of back edge of pump sensor

sensor and 1s passed before 1s

WAITING FOR FRONT

EDGE OF PUMP
SENSOR

No detection of front edge of pump Detection of front edge of

sensor and 1s passed pump sensor before 1s

Timeout on pump detection.

One pump or the switch
ERROR
associated, may be out of
order

STOP OF PUMP Stop of power supply

MOTOR of pump motor
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

INCREMENTING OF Nb_Pump_Turns_done =
NUMBER OF ROUNDS Nb_Pump_Turns_done+
DONE 1

Legend of text Legend of links

Black text in frame: Status Arrows: Possible paths

Red text: User action Bold arrows: Ideal path
Red text in wavy frame: error Dotted lines: Status/events associations
message
Blue text: Physical event
Green text: Non-physical event
This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 136 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.2.4. Electronic drawings

7.2.4.1.Tank board (pumps)

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 137

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.2.4.2.Tank board (pressurestats)

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 138 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.2.4.3.Tank board plan

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 139

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.2.5. Changing components

Before changing any of the following components, follow the procedure below.

1. In your DKS application, make sure the STOP/GO button is red.

2. Quit the DKS application.
3. Shut your PC down and switch off the machine.
4. Unplug the machine.

7.2.5.1. Changing the bleach/fix pressurestat

1. Open the left-hand side panel.

2. Unclip the tube from the pressurestat (see opposite picture).
3. Disconnect the wires from the top of the pressurestat.

Note: make sure to remember the connections to reconnect the pressurestat

correctly.
4. Unclip the pressurestat.
5. Change the pressurestat and carry out these operations in the reverse order
to reassemble the system.

7.2.5.2. Changing the developer and/or the stabilizer pressurestat(s)

1. Open the right-hand front panel.

2. Remove the three effluent tubes by pulling them up (see opposite picture).

3. Unscrew the two lateral screws of the protection plate and the screw on top (see left picture
below).
4. Through the middle hole of the protection, unscrew the screw close to the CTO tank (see right
picture below: view from the left-hand side panel).
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

Note: check that once the hydraulic circuit has been rebooted, using the SU mode, the pressure switch lights
on and that the chemicals board turns green.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 140 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

5. Remove the protection plate. 1

6. Unclip the tube from the pressurestat (2 on opposite picture).
7. Disconnect the wires from the top of the pressurestat (1 on opposite
picture).

Note: make sure to remember the connections to reconnect the pressurestat

correctly.
8. Unclip the pressurestat by pulling it. 2
9. Change the pressurestat and carry out these operations in the reverse
order to reassemble the system.

7.2.5.3. Changing the pumps

1. Open the right side front panel.

2. Remove the product tube from the drums concerned so there can be no siphoning of the product.
3. Drain the circuit by removing the plug from the pump flow measurement circuit.
6. Unscrew the pump inlet and outlet nozzles.
4. Disconnect the two connectors (left picture below).
5. Unscrew the pump bracket (1 on center picture below).
6. Remove the two screws so that you can remove the pump panel (2 on center picture below).
7. Move the panel to access the pump connector (right picture below).
8. To reassemble, carry out the operations in the reverse order.

Note: check and adjust of the pump flow-rate.

1
1

2 2
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 141

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.3. Switches

7.3.1. Principle

Several switches are linked to the tank board:

• Lid switch
• Pressurestats
• Water tank empty switch
• CTO tank empty switch
• Developer, Bleach fix and Stabilizer effluent switches
• Overflow switch

7.3.1.1. Lid switch

When you open the cover to access the racks and the dryer, the Led 32 switches off, the small relay
of the tank board cuts off to switch off the rack motor.
The dryer static relay (the right one) of the power supply unit stops in order to switch off the 220V
that supplies the dryer.
The rack motor stops even if it is controlled because the relay is open.

7.3.1.2. Pressurestats

The pressurestats allow to detect if the concentrated chemistry tank to which it is connected is
empty or not.
1 If it is not empty, pumps may run when driven.
2 If it is empty:
• a red square displays on the concerned tank on the screen
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

Red = empty Red = empty

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 142 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.3.1.3. Water tank empty switch

The water tank empty switch allows to detect if the tank to which it is connected is empty or not.
1 If it is not empty, pumps may run when driven.
2 If it is empty:
• a red square displays on the concerned tank on the screen

Red = empty

7.3.1.4. Developer, Bleach Fix and Stabilizer effluent switches

A capacity percentage counter on the DKS application screen shows the operator that the effluent
tanks are full.
When they are full, they have to be emptied in order to avoid leaking.
This percentage counter is based on the replenishment done by the machine (see Replenishment pump
paragraph).

If for some reason, the percentage is wrong, a

double security is carried out thanks to the effluent
full switches.
When the tank is full, the switch drives the tank
board.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

The tank board beeps and informs the PC (and up-

dates the screen of the DKS application here under
by displaying the switch in red).

If the DKS application was printing, it turns the switch from green to red and a message displays
prompting you to empty the tanks.
The machine then stops pumping replenishment chemistry.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 143

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.3.1.5. Overflow switch

A retention tray is located just under the cartridge tray.

In case of leaking of one of them, the liquid goes down in the retention tray and activates the over-
flow switch.

When the overflow switch is activated, the tank board beeps and sends a signal to the PC so that the
DKS application turns the switch from green to red and a message displays prompting you to empty
the tanks.
The replenishment operation stops.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 144 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.3.2. Electronic drawing: Switches

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 145

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.3.3. Changing switches

Before changing any of the following components, follow the procedure below.

1. In your DKS application, make sure the STOP/GO button is red.

2. Quit the DKS application.
3. Shut your PC and the machine down.
4. Unplug the machine.

7.3.3.1. Changing the Lid switch

1. Lift the dryer and remove the left rear

panel (2 screws).

2. Disconnect the switch (connector is close to the motor rack as shown on

opposite picture).
Warning: the motor power connector is identical to the connector of the cover closing switch.The only difference
is the wire section. Motor power wires have a bigger section.Wires feeding the rack motor cell and switch wires
have a single harness.

3. Remove all the fixation collars between the switch and

the switch and its connector.

4. Remove the two screws from the Lid switch (see opposite picture).
5. Change the switch and carry out these operations in the reverse order to reassemble the system.

7.3.3.2. Changing the effluent tank switches

1. Open the left-hand rear panel (2 screws). 1

2. Disconnect the sensor (1).
3. Loosen the locking nut (2).
4. Remove the sensor (3).
5. Carry out these operations in the reverse 2
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

order to reassemble.
3

Note: ensure the sensor is the right way round (see opposite picture).

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 146 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.3.3.3. Changing the CTO switch (optional)

1. Open the right-hand side panel by pulling it.
2. Disconnect the sensor (see left-hand picture below).
3. Loosen the locking nut (see right-hand picture below).
4. Remove the sensor.
5. Carry out these operations in the reverse order to reassemble.

Note: ensure the sensor is the right way round (see picture above).

7.3.3.4. Changing the water tank switch

1. Open the right-hand front panel.

2. Remove the three effluent tubes by pulling them up (see left picture below), open their valve by
turning it and empty the effluent tanks in another tank (see right picture below).

Note: remember the position of each effluent tube in order to remount it correctly.

3. Open the left-hand rear panel (2 screws).

4. Remove the fixation collar of the water tube (see opposite
picture).
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

5. Unscrew the fixation ring of the water tube to remove it

from the water tank (see opposite picture).

Note: place a retention tray below the tube since the water tank
empties when you remove the tube.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 147

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

6. Remove the fixation ring of the black tube near the fan (see opposite
picture) so that you can move the water tank later.

7. Remove two fixation rings to free the wire (1 and 2 on opposite picture). 3

8. Disconnect the wire (3 on opposite picture). 2

9. Disconnect the three effluent switches (see opposite picture).

9. Unscrew three screws to remove the effluent tanks' support plate

and the tanks (see opposite picture).

10. Lift the left side of the water tank, and pull it strongly to remove it from its housing (see right
picture below).

11. Remove the tube from the water tank (left picture below).
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

12. Remove and disconnect the switch that is located at the bottom
of the water (see opposite picture).

13. Carry out these operations in the reverse order to reassemble.

Note: when you put the effluent tanks back in place, make sure to correctly insert
the spillway in the hole (see opposite picture).

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 148 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.3.3.5. Changing the overflow switch

1. Remove the water tank (see previous paragraph) to access the retention
tray.
2. Disconnect the overflow switch.
2. Change the overflow switch and carry out these operations in the reverse
order to reassemble.

Note: seize the edge of the retention tray (arrow on opposite picture) to lift it and
access the switch more easily.

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 149

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.4. Tank drive and shaft

7.4.1. Tank drive and shaft presentation

The drive and shaft rotate the rollers of the racks to transfer the paper from one bath to the next.
The motor (A on the picture below) drives the shaft (B on the picture below) thanks to two pulleys
(C and C' on the picture below) and a belt (D on the picture below). Each endless screw (E on the
picture below) rotates an intermediate shaft (F on the picture below) that drives the rollers of the
racks.
F

E
B

C' A

The motor speed is regulated by the tank card sensor (A on the picture below) and an eight-
hole thumbwheel (B on the picture below) mounted on the motor shaft. One revolution of the
motor therefore generates eight pulses.

B
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

The relationship between the speed in rpm and the frequency is displayed on the screen:

(rpm x 8)/60 = frequency displayed

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 150 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.4.2. Rack speed regulation

The relationship between the speed in rpm and the frequency displayed of pulses sent to the tank
board on the screen is:
rpm x 8/60 = frequency

For example for a 20 sec chemistry, we have

1350 x 8/60 = 180

The rack speed is regulated by the tank board thanks to electronic components.

The coding wheel of the motor is sending some pulses to the board where we have a frequency /
voltage converter U24 (output on TP54).

During the tank board init, the PC has sent a speed instruction to the tank board µprocessor.
This analogic instruction is transform to a voltage level thank to a Digital / Analog converter U25
(Output on TP60).

The U12 circuit is comparing both voltages TP54 and TP 60 and will ask the U23 to increase or de-
crease the voltage on the motor to regulate the speed.

Depending on the analogic instruction sent by the PC to the tank board, we can regulate the rack
motor speed to the desired speed.

Note: see Electronic drawing: Motor Regulation further.

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 151

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.4.3. Rack speed calibration

7.4.3.1. Goal
By knowing the rack motor characteristics as well as the exact value of each components of the tank
board, we are able to calculate the THEORETICAL speed of the motor, its returned frequency value
for a given analogic instruction and its corresponding voltage applied to the motor.

Because of the components dispersions, the actual value of the speed will not necessary be the same
as the theoretical.
To compensate it, we have to calibrate the motor speed regulation system.

7.4.3.2. Process

To calibrate, we start the motor with an analogic instruction « A=980 » corresponding to a theoreti-
cal motor speed « S=1350 ».
After 10 seconds, (time for the board to regulate the motor speed at ~ S), we make a frequency rea-
ding « F » of the actual motor speed.

What we want is F to correspond to a process speed (20 sec for example).

We want F=180

If F is lower than 180, we make a second calibration step with a lower analogic instruction « 980+10
». After 10sec, we again measure F.

If F is higher than 180, we make another step with a lower value for A, like A= 970

We make several tests by dichotomy (try a little bit more, a little bit less until we find the right value
for A).

The calibration is successful when we have found the right value of A to get the exact frequency of
the motor for the concerned process.

Process Freq Theoretical analogic instruction

20 sec 180 980
30 sec 130 650
45 sec 80 430
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This A value is then saved in TransportPapier.ini:

[CUVE]
ConsignePtConvVitesseRack=983

This rack speed calibration should be done:

• at each stratup of the DKS application;
• after any chemistry change in 'Chimie.exe'.

Note: the dryer lid should be closed to allow calibration.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 152 060 311 714 B 12/2007

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.4.2. Racks motor cycles

Racks motor management

BEGINNING

STOP/GO Green

Rack Off Turn Off Rack Motor

Rack Still Off After 20 Min

Agitation Turn On Rack Motor

New Photo In DKS

New Photo In DKS Rack Still On After 5 Min

Starting Rack Turn On Rack Motor

Rack Stopped
No New Photo After 20 Min
(No Rack Top After 1 s)
Rack Started

Rack On

Rack Stopped
Tank Open (No Rack Top After 1 s)

"Tank Is Open" Turn Off Rack Motor Error Turn On Rack Motor

Tank Is Closed
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

Legend of text Legend of links

Black text in frame: Status Arrows: Possible paths

Red text: User action Bold arrows: Ideal path

Blue text: Physical event Dotted lines: Status/events associations

Green text: Non-physical event

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 153

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.4.3. Electronic drawing: motor regulation

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 154 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.4.4. Tank board plan

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 155

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.4.5. Motor speed adjustment: additional information

Note: refer to the board plan on previous page to locate the different elements described below.

LED16 TP58(V) TP59(V) TP60(V) TP61(V) TP53(V) TP96(Hz) U13-7(Hz)

ON 2 0.5 1.5 <1 5 180 180
ON 2 1 3 <1 5 80 80
OFF 2 X X 5 X 0 0
X X X X X X 0 0

TP54(V) J14-1(V) Dryer LED32 TP97(V) Rack

Lead Motor
5 1.5 Closed ON 24 ON
5 3 Closed ON 24 ON
<0.5 0 X X X OFF
<0.5 0 Open OFF 0 OFF
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 156 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.4.4. Changing components

Stop the machine and unplug it.

7.4.4.1. Accessing and removing the drive shaft S/A

1. Lift out the dryer.

2. Take off the cover from the semi-watertight tank.
3. Unscrew the 3 cover fixing screws from the maintenance channel.
4. Lift the maintenance channel a few centimeters up, using the tank filters to lock it in position.

Warning: the shims under the maintenance channel can fall into the chemicals!!!

5. Remove the lid belt protection, by unscrewing the two Torx T20 screws,
first to the right, and then to the left (see opposite picture).

6. Remove the belt. For this, slightly unscrew the two Torx T30 screws (1 3
and 2 on opposite picture) of the motor plate (3 on opposite picture) so
that you can lift it up on the left side (red arrow on opposite picture).
1 2
7. Remove the technical duct's cover by unscrewing the 3 screws (1 on picture
below).
6. Remove the 5 screws of the separating partitions. Push the partitions (2 on picture
below).
4. Remove the chemistry filters (3 on picture below).
5. Remove the 4 duct's fixing screws (4 on picture below).
6. Loosen the 3 probe screws (5 on picture below).
7. Lift and push the duct so that you can free the rack motor shaft.

1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

4
4 5

3 3 3 5 3 5 3

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 157

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7. Unscrew the two cross-headed

screws from the light valance (see
opposite picture) and remove it.

8. Unscrew the two Torx T20 screws from the first bearing seat, and do the same for the second one
(see pictures below).

9. Pull out and lift up the shafting through the tank exit port, at the same time freeing
both bearings from their seat (see opposite picture).
10. Carry out these operations in the reverse order to reassembly the drive.

Warning: take care with the shims under the maintenance channel. Do not make them fall into the
chemicals!!!

7.4.4.2. Changing the pulleys

1. Once the belt removed (see previous paragraph), unscrew the Torx
T30 screw from the pulley (see opposite picture). Remove the pulley.

2. Change the pulley and carry out these operations in the reverse order to reassembly the pulley.

Note: when remounting the pulley on its axis, ensure that the hole for the screw is above the flat surface left
picture below) of the axis and that the pulley is well positioned at the end of the axis (alignment line on right
picture below).
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 158 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.4.4.3. Changing the ball bearing of the long shaft end

1. Once the drive shaft removed, pull out the bearing seat manually (see opposite
picture).

2. Then pull out the bearing itself (see opposite picture).

3. Change the ball bearing and carry out these operations in the reverse order to reassembly the ball
bearing.

7.4.4.4. Changing the ball bearing of the short shaft end

1. Once the drive shaft removed, pull out the bearing seat manually (see opposite
picture).
2. Unscrew the Torx T20 screw maintaining the bearing.
Note: do not forget to put the washer between the screw head and the
bearing when remounting the ball bearing.

3. Then pull out the bearing itself (see opposite picture).

4. Change the ball bearing and carry out these operations in the reverse order to reassembly the ball
bearing.

7.4.4.5. Changing the pins of the axis

1. Once the drive shaft, the bearing seats and the bearing balls removed (see the two
previous paragraphs), remove the screw of the pin (see opposite picture).

2. Change the endless screw and carry out these operations in the reverse order
to reassembly the pin.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.4.4.6. Changing the motor shaft

Carry out all the previous operations to change the motor shaft.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 159

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.4.4.7. Changing the motor

1. First remove the reservoir next to the motor.

2. Remove the belt, then the motor's pulley (see previous paragraphs
and opposite picture).

3. Unplug the motor.

4. Remove the four screws maintaining the motor (red arrows

on opposite picture).

Note: take note of the position that the wire should be (black arrow on opposite
picture) in order to position the motor correctly when remounting it.

5. Change the motor and carry out these operations in the reverse order to remount the motor.
6. To tight the belt, the weight of the motor is enough.

7.4.4.8. Changing the encoding wheel

1. Unscrew the two Torx T20 screws maintaining the sensor board (see
opposite picture).

2. Remove the sensor board from the motor.

3. Remove the screw from the encoding wheel by using a 2.0 mm wrench
(see opposite picture).

4. Change the encoding wheel and carry out these operations in the reverse
order to remount it
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 160 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.5. Densitometer

7.5.1. Densitometer presentation

7.5.1.1. Goal of calibration

Depending on the light exposition, the paper type and the status of the chemistry, the final result on
the pictures may change.

To be able to determinate what quantity of Red, Green and Blue light we need to expose, to get a
certain (grey) color on the picture, the machine needs to be calibrated.

After the calibration, the machine will know exactly how long it should expose the paper on all 3
colors to get a good equilibrated grey on the pictures.

From this starting point, it will then be able to calculate the exposure times for any picture.

7.5.1.2. Physical description of the densitometer

A lamp illuminates the paper and / or the embedded chart.

An optical fibber sends the reflected light from the paper and / or the embedded chart onto cells located
on the tank board.

There is a system of filters located over the cells of the tank board so that the reflected light is divided in
the 3 main colors, Red, Green and Blue, and each component light of each color is then sent only on the
corresponding cell.

Filters Optical
fiber
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

Picture
RGB cells
on tank
Chart

Lamp

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 161

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.5.2. Densitometer cycles

7.5.2.1. Functional diagrams

To calibrate the paper, the machine prints a specific calibration picture (exposed with basic exposure
times, or the latest exposure times calculated before) and then reads and sends to the PC the RGB
component of the grey present on the picture.

It then reads the 3 RGB color component of the chart present inside the densitometer (on which the
PC will add some overrides stored in the PC and calculated during the densitometer calibration).

By comparing all these values, the DKS application is then able to know exactly the 3 values of the
calibration pictures (Red, Green and Blue).
See drawings here-under on how the machine can read either the paper or the chart.

Photo Measuring
Densito Lamp

Optical Fiber

Measuring of Photo All Luminous

Photo
Optical Parameters Intensities detected by
Measuring
with Densito Optical Fiber
White area White area
Grey line

Emitted light
light received by optical
fiber

Chart measuring
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

Optical fiber Densito lamp

Emitted light
light received by optical
measurement
Measuring ofof fiber
chart optical All Luminous
Embedded Photo Optical
parameters with Intensities detected
Chart Measuring Parameters with
Densito by Optical Fiber
Densito
Grey area black area

white area

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 162 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.5.2.2. Paper calibration mode (operator operation)

START
(N=0)

Click on « Paper Calibration »

Measurements Not OK Developping error Test chart

Developping N = N +1
Developping

Chart Test In Dryer (Nb of Rack Tops)

Densito Management

Measurements Photo Chart

OK data data

Data New Click on

Reading
Coherent? Calibration Of «Cancel»
New Calibration
Exposure
Time
Incoherent data Coherent data

« Error during Calculation of Test Chart

densitometer Error Analysis Calculation Intensities (Red, Green &
measurement» Blue)
yes
Intensities Out of Scope

Coherent Intensities
No N<5

Storage Of Calculation
Storage Intensities/ of Exposure
Exposure Time Time

Click on «Valid»

Data saved in
Save
TransportPapier.ini

END

Legend of text Legend of links

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

Black text in frame: Status Arrows: Possible paths

Red text: User action Bold arrows: Ideal path

Red text in wavy frame: Error message Dotted lines: Status/events associations

Blue text: Physical event

Green text: Non-physical event

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 163

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.5.3. Densitometer calibration

7.5.3.1. Presentation
To calibrate the densitometer, the operator will enter with the keyboard the 3 RGB values written
on the calibration chart.

The DKS application will read the data and compare them to what it is actually reading when intro-
ducing the paper chart during the calibration procedure.

The machine will determinate the differences between what it actually reads and what it is supposed
to read, and store the « offset » in an ini file, which will then be used each time the machine will read
any paper during paper setup.

7.5.3.2. Densitometer calibration mode (operator)

START

User inserts a test chart

Insertion
in DKS3
No

User inputs the 3 RGB

Input components for black &
Measurements Not OK white colors of test chart

Click on «Start»
RGB components
?
known (supplier gives
« STOP GO » in Red values)
color ?

Yes

Densito Management Click on

«Cancel»

Measurements Photo Chart

OK data data

« Error during the

densitometer Analysis of
Error Analysis Incoherent data Analyzing
measurement » data
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

Coherent data

intensities calculation of
Calculation
Legend of text embedded chart

Black text in frame: Status

Information
Orange text: User action Display
displayed

Blue text: Physical event

Green text: Non-physical event Click on «Valid»

Legend of links Data saved in

Save
TransportPapier.ini
Arrows: Possible paths

Bold arrows: Ideal path

END
Dotted lines: Status/events associations

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 164 060 311 714 B 12/2007

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.5.4. Densitometer management

START

« Densito light
default. It might be Lamp densito always Power on Lamp densito
Lamp Error Lamp Power On
burned» OFF after 60 s densito ON

Lamp ON detected

« Timout on waiting PHD Densito

Photo not detected Detection of Detection Of
Densito Error Sensor
photo on PHD after 60s Photo Leading Photo Leading
densito» Reading

Photo detected within 60 s

Photo put
« Speed rack null» Speed Error Rack stopped Waiting for X
POSITIONNING under densito
(no rack top after 1 s) top rack
lamp

X top rack OK
Every luminous
measurement of photo Data sent to
Photo intensities
optical parameters with PC DKS
Measuring detected by the application
Densito (see diagrams)
optical fiber

Measure finished
« Timout on waiting
photo on PHD Detection Of
Densito Error Photo not detected Photo Trailing PHD densito
densito» Trailing
after 60 s Detection sensor reading
Detection

No paper detected

Measurement Not OK Photo leaves Waiting for X

Leaving
densito area track tops

X top rack OK
Measurement of
Chart Optical Every luminous Data sent
Embedded Parameters with intensities detected to PC DKS
Legend of text Chart Measuring Densito (see by the optical fiber application
diagrams)
Black text in frame: Status Measure finished and OK

Red text: User action Chart data

END
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

Photo
data
Red text in wavy frame: Error message

Blue text: Physical event

PaperTransport.ini
Green text: Non-physical event X = NbrTopsRackAvantMesureDensito (0x0E)
This is the number of rack motor tops to wait for after a photo
has been detected on sur phdDensito, before starting a densito
Legend of links measurement.

Arrows: Possible paths

Bold arrows: Ideal path

Dotted lines: Status/events associations

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 165

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.5.5. Densitometer and power supply

7.5.5.1.Tank board plan

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 166 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.5.5.2. Additional information

Note: refer to the board plan on previous page to locate the different test points and Leds.

Example of Densitometer measurements on embedded chart

Chart area Red (TP11) Green (TP13) Blue (TP14)

White 3.35 3.92 3.23
Grey 2.72 3.31 2.66
Black 1.55 2.11 1.47

Paper detection

Detect right Detect left

Paper LD18 TP94 LD17 TP95
Present ON 0 ON 0
Absent OFF 12V OFF 12V

Power supply

Test point TP75 TP76 TP77 TP78 TP13 TP14

Voltage (V) 12 -12 5 24 12 -12
Corresponding LD22 LD23 LD24 LD25
LED 'ON'

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 167

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.5.6. Electronic drawing: densitometer board

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 168 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.5.7. Changing components

Before changing any of the following components, follow the procedure below.

1. In your DKS application, make sure the STOP/GO button is red.

2. Quit the DKS application.
3. Shut your PC and your machine down.
4. Unplug the machine.

7.5.7.1. Changing the densitometer's lamp

1. Tip the dryer.
2. Open the dryer cabinet hatch.
Warning: the densitometer lamp can be extremely hot.

3. Remove the densitometer lamp sleeve (see opposite picture).

4. Loosen the two Torx T10 screws in order to free the densitometer
lamp (see opposite picture).

5. Change the densitometer lamp by using a plier (see opposite picture)

and carry out these operations in the reverse order to remount it.

7.5.7.2. Changing the densitometer's optic fiber (between the densitometer and
the coupler)
1. Tip the dryer.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

2. Open the dryer cabinet hatch.

3. Slightly unscrew the optic fiber's clamping screw (opposite picture).

4. Unplug the optic fiber from its assy's slot (left picture below) and remove it through the flange's
hole (right picture below).

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 169

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

5. Remove the 230V protection (1 on opposite picture) beside the fan

(2 on opposite picture) by removing the two screws (red arrows on
opposite picture). 2
1

6. Remove the fixation clamps from their slots (see opposite picture).

7. Slightly unscrew the optic fiber's clamp (left picture below) to loosen the optic fiber and remove
the optic fiber from the coupler (right picture below).

Warning: the clamp is very

fragile. Do not bent it!!!

8. Change the optic fiber and carry out these operations in the reverse order to remount it.
Warning: be careful, the optic fiber is very fragile!!!
9. Redo the densitometer setting.

7.5.7.3. Changing the densitometer's optic fiber (between the coupler and the
tank board)

1. Tip the dryer.

2. Open the dryer cabinet hatch.
3. Open the chemistry door.
4. Open the electric box's door.
5. Under the dryer, slightly unscrew the optic fiber's clamp (opposite pic-
ture) to loosen the optic fiber and remove the optic fiber from the coupler.

6. Remove the fixation rings as shown on the opposite

picture.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7. Remove the fixation clamp from its slot (1 on op-

posite picture).
8. Remove the optical fiber by pulling it through the 1
hole (2 on opposite picture).
9. Remove the analysis box (3 on opposite picture) 3
and the optic fiber from the tank board by unscrewing
the central screw).
10. Change the optic fiber and carry out these opera- 2
tions in the reverse order to remount it.

Warning: be careful, the optic fiber is very fragile!!!

11. Redo the densitometer setting.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 170 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.6. Dryer

7.6.1. Dryer presentation

To dry the pictures, the machine blows hot air. A big turbine blows air through a resistor to warm it
up.

An NTC (Negative Coefficient Temperature) is placed in front of the output of the system to allow
the tank board to read the temperature.
When the air is not hot enough, the board is driving the resistor.
When the air is hot enough, the board stops driving the heater.

Note: there is a security thermal fuse also located close to the heater to eventually cut the 220V if the
temperature becomes too hot.

Note: when the dryer lid is open, the magnetical switch sends the information to, the tank board. The LED32
goes OFF and the 220V for the whole dryer is cut.

7.6.2. Temperature regulation

As said before, the tank board is driving or not the heaters to regulate the temperature around the
settings.

To avoid electrical perturbations on the line by constantly switching ON / OFF a very powerful hea-
ter, we use in fact two medium heaters:

The two heaters are driven independently and are never turned ON and OFF in the meantime.

As each heater only has half of the total necessary power, it does not make any electrical perturba-
tion on the line (Flicker).

7.6.3. Temperature management

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

The temperature setting is stored in v

[CUVE]
ConsigneAirHaute=70.0 Maximum temp
allowed
ConsigneAirBasse=60.0 Actual temp setting

The actual temperature setting is adjustable

through the DKS application in S.U User.

S.U / Dryer / Modify reference:

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 171

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.6.4. Air regulation

7.6.4.1. Electronic drawing: air regulation
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 172 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.6.4.2. Air regulation: Tank board plan

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 173

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.6.4.3. Air regulation: additional information

Note: refer to the board plan on previous page to locate the different test points and Leds.

Air Temperature Sensor response

Temperature (°C) 20 30 40 50 60 70 0 90 100

Sensor Resistance 60.6 36.7 22.9 14.8 9.8 6.6 4.58 3.24 2.33
(Kohm)
Sensor Resistance 0.64 0.71 0.81 0.97 1.19 1.51 1.94 2.52 3.29
(Kohm)

Heating Resistor RES2

µP command Temperature limit Main Stat Relay Dryer Lead Heater

TP99 LD28 TP29 T°Air TP93 LD20 LD32 RES2
0 ON <4,5V <110°C 0 ON CLOSED ON ON
1 OFF X X X X X X OFF
X X >4,5V >110°C X X X X OFF
X X X X >4V OFF X X OFF
X X X X X X OPEN OFF OFF

Heating Resistor RES1

µP command Temperature limit Main Stat Relay Dryer Lead Heater

TP100 LD19 TP29 T°Air TP93 LD20 LD32 RES1
0 ON <4,5V <110°C 0 ON CLOSED ON ON
1 OFF X X X X X X OFF
X X >4,5V >110°C X X X X OFF
X X X X >4V OFF X X OFF
X X X X X X OPEN OFF OFF
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

Blower and 230 V fan

µP command Main Stat Relay Dryer Cover Blower

TP98 LD21 TP93 LD20 LD32
0 ON 0 ON CLOSED ON ON
X X 1 OFF X X OFF
X X X X OPEN OFF OFF

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 174 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.6.5. Changing components

Before changing any of the following components, follow the procedure below.

1. In your DKS application, make sure the STOP/GO button is red.

2. Quit the DKS application.
3. Shut your PC and the machine down.
4. Unplug the machine.

7.6.5.1. Changing the dryer fan

1. Open the dryer lid.

2. Remove the two dryer hood retaining screws (see opposite pictures).

3. Fold open the dryer hood sub-assembly.

4. Remove the 230V protection (see opposite picture).

5. Unplug the ground wire that is screwed onto the base (see pictures below) by removing the screw.

Note: note the position of the washers when unplugging the ground wire in order to put it back correctly when
reassembling the fan.

6. Disconnect the equipped dryer resistance of the fan sub-assembly (see both pictures below).
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 175

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7. Disconnect the fan power supply.

Note: note the connections (see diagram and picture below) before disconnecting the fan power supply in order
to reconnect it correctly when reassembling the fan.

8. Remove the 4 screws from the dryer fan sub-assembly (see pictures below).

9. Remove the sub-assembly.

10. Unscrew the 4 fan fixing screws (see pictures below).
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

11. Change the fan and carry out these operations in the reverse order to remount it.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 176 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.6.5.2. Changing the capacitor

1. Open the terminal receiver.

2. Remove the two dryer hood retaining screws.

3. Fold open the dryer hood sub-assembly.

4. Remove the 230V protection (see opposite picture).

5. Disconnect the fan's power supply from the capacitor (see opposite
picture).

Note: remember the connections in order to reconnect the capacitor properly.

10. Remove the capacitor by unscrewing it, change it and carry out these operations in the reverse
order to remount it.

7.6.5.3. Changing the CTN and fuse board

1. Open the terminal receiver.

2. Remove the two dryer hood retaining screws.

3. Fold open the dryer hood sub-assembly.

4. Remove the dryer fan sub-assembly (see 7.5.5.1. Changing the dryer fan).

5. Disconnect the CTN and fuse board (see opposite picture).

6. Remove the two fixation screws, the fuse board plastic protection and then the fuse board (see
left picture below).

Note: do not forget the two board spacers when remounting the fuse board (see right picture below).
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

10. Change the CTN and fuse board and carry out these operations in the reverse order to re-
mount it.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 177

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.6.5.4. Changing the thermal fuse

1. Open the terminal receiver.

2. Remove the two dryer hood retaining screws.
3. Fold open the dryer hood sub-assembly.
4. Remove the dryer fan sub-assembly (see 7.5.5.1. Changing the dryer fan).
5. Remove the CTN and fuse board (see previous paragraph).
6. Remove the thermal fuse by unscrewing two screws (see opposite
picture)
7. Change the thermal fuse and carry out these operations in the reverse
order to remount it.

7.6.5.5. Changing the equipped dryer resistance

1. Open the terminal receiver.

2. Remove the two dryer hood retaining screws.
3. Fold open the dryer hood sub-assembly.
4. Remove the dryer fan sub-assembly (see 7.5.5.1. Changing the dryer fan).
5. Unscrew the two screws of the blower's support cover (see pictures below).

6. Remove the blower's support and the equipped dryer

resistance (see opposite picture).
7. Remove the double fuse board (see 7.5.5.3. Changing the
double fuse board).
8. Remove the thermal fuse (see 7.5.5.3. Changing the
double fuse board).
9. Unscrew the four fixation screws of the equipped
dryer resistance (see opposite picture).
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

10. Change the dryer resistance and carry out these operations in the reverse order to remount it.

Note: when remounting the dryer resistance, make sure that the black resistor is on the right side as shown
below.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 178 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.6.5.6. Changing the static relays

1. Open the terminal receiver.

2. Remove the two dryer hood retaining screws.
3. Fold open the dryer hood sub-assembly.
4. Remove the 230V protection.
5. Disconnect the wires of the drying control harness by unscrewing their fixation clamp (1 on the
picture below).
6. Disconnect the brown wires (of the 230V harness) by unscrewing their fixation clamp.
7. Unscrew two fixation screws (2 on picture below) for each relay to be changed.
8. Change the static relay(s) and carry out these operations in the reverse order to remount it.

Note: make sure to remember the correct wire connections (see picture below) by referring to the color for the
control harness wires or to the number for the 230V harness wires.

Pink Yellow Pink Green Pink Black

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 179

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.7. Sorter

7.7.1. Sorter presentation

The sorter is actually made up of two large belts allowing to make advance each pile of pictures
between each order.
It can make advance each track separately or both together when printing large size picture orders.
Cells at the end of the sorter detect when it is full.

Note: you can see the status of the fill sensor on the screen.

7.7.2. Sorter cycles

BEGINNING

Photo Not First One Of New Request Photo Not First One Of New Request
And And
Photo First One Of New Request
Nb Photos On Pile > Nb Photos Per Pile Nb Photos On Pile < Nb Photos Per Pile
(NbrPhotosMaxParPiles ) ( NbrPhotosMaxParPiles )

Sorter Motor Advances Of X

Sorter Motor Advances of X Tops
New Pile Tops (X = New Photo New Request
(X = NbrPasPourSéparerOrdres)
NbrPasPourSéparerPiles)

Nb Photos On Piles =
Nb Photos Nb Photos On Pile =1 Nb Photos Nb Photos Nb Photos On Pile =1
Nb Photos On Pile +1

END
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

Legend of text Legend of links

Black text in frame: Status Arrows: Possible paths

Red text: User action Bold arrows: Ideal path

Blue text: Physical event Dotted lines: Status/events associations

Green text: Non-physical event

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 180 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.7.3. Electronic drawing: sorter

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 181

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.7.4. Sorter: tank board plan

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 182 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.7.5. Sorter and power supply

Note: refer to the board plan on previous page to locate the different test points and Leds.

MOTOR TP 87(V) TP 88(V) Winding Max

Current (A)
Stopped 4.5 4.5 0.6
Working 24 24 3

Paper detection

Paper LD27 TP90 LD31 TP89

Present ON 0 ON 0
Absent OFF 12V OFF 12V

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 183

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.7.6. Changing components

Before changing any of the following components, follow the procedure below.

1. In your DKS application, make sure the STOP/GO button is red.

2. Quit the DKS application.
3. Shut your PC and the machine down.
4. Unplug the machine.
5. Open the terminal receiver.
6. Remove the two dryer hood retaining screws (see opposite pictures).
7. Fold open the dryer hood sub-assembly.

7.7.6.1. Removing the dryer stacker

1. Disconnect the 25-pin sub D (see right opposite picture).

2. Unlock the order separator to do
this, pull the latch (1 on left opposite
picture) and free it from the rear (2
on left opposite picture).

3. Carry out these operations in the reverse order to reassemble the system.

7.7.6.2. Changing the stacker's receiver board 1

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

1. Unplug the harness from the stacker's receiver board (1 on

opposite picture).
2. Unscrew the two screws (2 on opposite picture).
3. Change the board and carry out these operations in the re-
verse order to reassemble the system. 2

Note: check the board with the Diag DKS or with the DKS interface.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 184 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.7.6.3. Changing the stacker's emitter board 1

1. Unplug the grador motor harness from the stacker's emitter
board (1 on opposite picture).
2. Unscrew the two screws (2 on opposite picture).
3. Change the board and carry out these operations in the re-
verse order to reassemble the system.
2
Note: check the board with the Diag DKS or with the DKS interface.

7.7.6.4. Changing the stacker roller's notched pulleys and the belts

1. Unscrew the BTR 2 mm screw (see opposite picture) of the notched pulley.
2. Remove the pulley and the belt.
3. Change the pulley and carry out these operations in the reverse order to reas-
semble the system.

Note: position the pulley so that its screw comes over the flat surface of the roller (see left picture below), then
use a metal ruler to ensure both pulleys are strictly parallel (see right picture below).

7.7.6.5. Changing the motors

1
1. Remove the three cables ties (1 on opposite picture).

2. Unplug the motor from the grador motor harness (2 on oppo-

site picture).
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

3. Remove the notched pulley from the motor by

unscrewing its screw (see opposite picture). 2

4. Remove the four screws, then the washers (see opposite picture).

5. Change the pulley and carry out these operations in the reverse order to
reassemble the system.

Note: position the pulley so that its screw comes over the flat surface of the roller (see left picture below), then
use a metal ruler to ensure both pulleys are strictly parallel (see right picture below).

Note: moderately tighten the belts when remounting the motors.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 185

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

7.7.6.5. Changing the rollers, ball-bearing and the conveyor band

1. Remove the four screws and four washers (1 on opposite 2

picture of bottom view) allowing to adjust the band tension-
ers from the front of the conveyor cover.

2. Remove then the four nuts and four washers (2 on op-

posite picture) that maintain the band tensioners fixed to the
bottom of the sub-assembly.
1
Note: when reassembling the sub-assembly, adjust the conveyor band by tightening the four screws and four
washers to ensure its tightness and evenness are optimum that can run smoothly.

3. Remove the comb of photo exit (1 on opposite picture)

by unscrewing the two nuts (2 on picture) and then by 2
unslotting it from the front of the conveyor cover (3 on
picture).
1

3 2

4. Pull up the band tensioners (1 on opposite picture) 1

freeing the screws 2 on picture) from their bottom
housing (3 on picture).

2 2
3

5. Unhook both ends (left picture below) of each roller from the tensioners (right picture below) to
free them.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

6. Remove the rollers from the conveyor bands.

7. On the motors' side, remove the notched pulleys and the belts (see paragraph 7.6.5.4. Changing the
stacker roller's notched pulleys and the belts).

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 186 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

8. Pull the roller to remove it from the motor mount (1 on left picture below) and from the middle
slot (2 on left picture below).

9. Remove the rollers from the conveyor bands. You can possibly
remove the ball bearings (see opposite picture) from the rollers to
change them.

10. Change a conveyor belt, a roller and/or a ball bearing and carry out these operations in the re-
verse order to reassemble the system.

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 187

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 188 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

8. PC

8.1. Changing the PC

Before changing the PC, follow the procedure below.

1. In your DKS application, make sure the STOP/GO button is red. 1 2

2. Quit the DKS application.
3. Shut your PC and the machine down.
4. Unplug the machine.
5. Open the right-hand rear panel to access the PC.
6. Disconnect all the cables from the back of the PC (dotted
frame on opposite picture).
7. Loosen one screw (1 on opposite picture) to make the
clamp (2 on opposite picture) slide to the right and remove it.
8. Change the PC and carry out these operations in the re-
verse order to reassemble the system.

Note: refer to Chapter 3 (Installation instructions) of this manual to know

about how to reconnect.

Note: ensure the PC is right againt the exposure room panel and its back
is right against the stop end (see opposite picture).

Note: once the PC changed, you can possibly load the ghosts, load the
backup an install the software (see Chapter 9: Software Installation and
Procedure in this manual).

8.2. Changing the PCI LVDS CAN board

1. Remove the PC (refer to previous paragraph).

2. Push the latch to open the right cover of the PC (see left picture below).
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

3. Lie the PC flat on its left side(see right picture below).

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 189

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

4. Push in the latch (1 on opposite picture) to free and remove the

1
PCI LVDS board (see opposite picture).
5. Change the board and carry out these operations in the reverse 2
order to reassemble the system.
Note: when mounting the new board, ensure the board is secure on tightly
(2 on opposite picture) and in still position (3 on opposite picture). 3

Note: there is only one version of the board's firmware. Thus it does not need to be updated. The PCI LVDS
board is a plug-and-play board that does not require any operation from the operator.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 190 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

9. Appendix
9.1. Stepper motors

9.1.1. Principle
Stepper motors are used in the machine everywhere the paper advance precision is important.
Unlike the DC motor, the speed and angle of rotation directly depend on the command.

Operation
Stepper motors used in the DKS3 are unipolar motors. They consist of 4 main windings. Two wind-
ings are connected together on one side. The rotor is made up of a magnet. When windings are sup-
plied, they generate an electromagnetic field that attracts the rotor’s magnet.
Supplying successively windings make the motor turn.

Electronic schematic of unipolar stepper motor

Common AC Phase BC

Phase A Phase B Phase C Phase D

Stepper motors can be controlled in multiple ways (single full step mode, double full step mode, half
step mode).
In the DKS3, all stepper motors are controlled in half step mode: successively, one or two phases
are supplied. This operation mode doubles the number of positions available for the motor.
All motors used in the DKS rotate 1.8°/step, and thus rotate 0.9°/half step.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

Note: a step in configuration files or in DiagDKS is an half step for the motor.

Supply of stepper motors

Supplied winding

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 191

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

9.1.2. Stepper motors: MM by top

Gear B
19 teeth

Gear A Gear B
19 teeth 38 teeth

Photo advance

Theoretically, by knowing the angle rotation of the motor per step, and knowing the numbers of gears
of each gear, the paper advance of the picture can be calculated.

In order to get a more precise system, the actual advance made for each step should be "calibrated".
For this, a certain numbers of steps should be carried out from a starting position and the actual
paper advance should then be measured.
The advance should then be divided by the steps made to get the final advance for one step.
Ex: 317mm for 2 000 steps = 0.158500

This accurate value is then stored in an '.ini' file of the machine’s PC.

[MM_PAR_TOP]
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

Length for device X = 0.158500

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 192 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

9.2. Reflective IR sensors operation

Reflective IR sensor

IR sensors are made up of two main components: an emitter and a receptor. The emitter emits in-
frared light. When paper is placed on the sensor, the light is reflected and the receptor creates a little
current used by the electronic above.
This type of sensor has an operating range from 1mm to 5mm.

Note: to avoid blue mark created by infrared light on photo paper, the emitter is only controlled when the
paper advances.

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 5 - p. 193

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Repairing & Adjusting

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 5 - p. 194 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

Chapter 6 - Settings

1. Machine preparation before switch on������������������������������������������������������������������ 3

1.1. Levelling����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 3
1.2. Preparration and chemistry application��������������������������������������������������������������������������� 3

2. Machine switch on������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 4

2.1. Using DiagDKS���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 4
2.2. Chemical declaration������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 6
2.3. Scanner connection�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 6
2.4. Starting of the DKS application, Rack speed checking�������������������������������������������������� 6

3. Preliminary settings���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 7
3.1. Flicker setting������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 7
3.2. Auto-heating programming������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 7
3.3. Tank checking������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 7
3.4. Dryer settings������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 8
3.5. Chemical setting�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 9

4. Densitometer calibration���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 12
4.1. X-Rite calibration���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 12
4.2. Densitometer calibration�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 12

5. Mechanical (preliminary) lenses centering���������������������������������������������������������� 15

5.1. Lens and LCD offsets adjustment����������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 15
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

5.2. Optical plate adjustment��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 16

6. Zero adjustment - LCD, Lens��������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 17

7. Optical setting����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 18

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 6 - p. 

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

7.1. Lens sharpness (Focus)�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������18

7.2. Polarizer setting������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������23
7.3. Gain adjustment�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������23
7.4. LED calibration�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������24
7.5. LLCD stability���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������25
7.6. LCD response���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������26
7.7. Offsets LED�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������27

8. Mechanical settings��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������28
8.1. Mm / Top������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������28
8.2. Optical centering����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������30
8.3. Centering setting����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������31

9. Quality photo setting����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������34

9.1. Paper calibration����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������34
9.2. PRNU (Pixel Response Non Uniformity)���������������������������������������������������������������������35
9.3. Piezo calibration�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������40
9.4. Chromatic aberration lens 2�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������42

10. Quality Photo Validation���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������45

10.1. Sharpness and quality photo results����������������������������������������������������������������������������46
10.2. Backprint����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������48
10.3. Machine Productivity Check�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������49
10.4. Lastest Check�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������49

11. Delivery of the machine to Quality Dpt����������������������������������������������������������50

11.1. Film scanner connection������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������50
11.2. Constitution of the calibration file������������������������������������������������������������������������������50
11.3. Backup of machine parameters������������������������������������������������������������������������������������51
11.4. Preparation of the machine for the quality department�����������������������������������������51
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 6 - p.  060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

The adjustments must be made in “ADMINISTRATOR” mode,

Password : DKSLF.
SuperUser mode [SU] password: TEC to directly switch to the SU mode.

1. Machine preparation before switch on

1.1. Levelling

Key 13, multiple slip joint pliers

• Place the machine at the work post
• Check that the four machine wheels are touching the ground.
• Open the drying rack and remove the cover of the tank.
• Lay a spirit level on the tank and level the tank by acting on the 3 wheels (the wheel located at the
left rear corner is not adjustable).

1.2. Preparation and chemistry application

Before chemistry application, check all the taps are closed!!!

Fill the tanks STABILISER; BLEACH-FIXER and DEVELOPER according to the process described on
the preparation sheet (see instructions in Appendix 3).
To save chemistry, re-use old chemistry from another machine (up to 3 machines for prepared Deve-
loper & Beach)

CAUTION:
(Protect the developer tank with paper when filling the bleach tank in order to avoid contaminating
the developer tank.)
• When handing chemicals or the racks, use the recommended protection equipment.
• Skin contact with certain products may cause irritation or an allergic reaction.
• In the event of contact with skin or eyes, immediately wash with abundant fresh water.
• In the event of swallowing or splashing into eyes, consult a doctor

Check there is a correct fluid level inside each tank division, if not reach the expected level by putting
water directly in the tank.
Check the correct meshing of the gear on each rack with the motor drive pinion.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 6 - p. 

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

2. Machine switch on
Switch on the machine – main green switch (down, left side of the unit).

2.1. Using DiagDKS

Open C:\DKS\Constantes\Tools\DiagDKS and launch the DiagDKS.exe.

Initialise the PCB by selecting Init.

2.1.1. Firmware version check

Wait for the three PCB description to be highlighted on green and check the firmware versions
displayed under ‘’Version Production’’. If versions are not the good one than reboot the PCB with the
expected ones.

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

Versions must be in accordance with the latest delivery list from KIS software team.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 6 - p. 

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

2.2.2. Mechanical checking

• C heck the freedom of rotation of the rollers on the pressure drums on the printer modules.
• Check the configuration of the springs on the pressure drums by exerting a force on the drums :
• All the springs of the printer module should be the same except for the first roller with plastic
rollers; springs are less strong than others.
• Check the printers modules, the inking ribbon should rotate freely by hand in the direction of the
arrow and drive the second opposing ribbon.
• Check that free parts (direction fins elements) from the exposure plane switch can move without
any blocking point, they should come back to their initial position after lifting them up.

2.2.3. Motors modules checking

Once firmwares are verified, go to Diagnostics\paper Transport and switch, if necessary the language
from French to English:

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

In the following actions, the different motors of the various modules would be checked, actuate all the
following modules and make sure they are properly working:

• Stock
• Exposure plane, should also be checked the backward advance
• Printer Module
• Introducer (tank introducing module)
• Exposure plane fan

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 6 - p. 

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

2.1.4. Paper detection on the different detection cells

Using DiagDKS, check functioning of all paper detection cells:

- Cartridges
- Prepositionning sensors in the feeder
- 6 sensors on exposure plane
- 4 sensors on printer module (2 before printers, 2 before tank input)
- 2 sensors in the drying module
- 2 sensors at the end of the stacker
Quit DiagDKS application.

2.2. Chemical declaration

• Execute C:\DKS\Chimie.exe
• Check the identification of the chemistry which should be ChimieSP20EM_HQ_DKS3
• If not declare ChimieSP20EM_HQ_DKS3 (choose in the list, then click on “Set as Current” button)

2.3. Scanner connection

• Out of the DKS Software

• Place the scanner on the support.
• Connect the power supply cable to the SCAN socket.
• Connect the USB cable to the computer front socket.
• Execute the FlatBedScan tool by double clicking on the icon on the desktop.
• I f the detection was properly done, than the following message should appear: ‘’Scanner EPSON
4490 was detected…’’
• Log off and log on as Administrator.
• Scanner should be available for the specific settings needing it (PRNU, piezo…)

2.4. Starting of the DKS application, Rack speed checking

• Click on DKSPrint application on the desktop

• Check software version on image appearing on the screen.
• After few seconds message “calibration of the chemistry is necessary…” -> click on « YES ». This
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

message means that rack speed will be calibrated automatically. This message will appear at any time a
new chemistry with different processing time will be chosen through Chimie.exe.
For ChimieSP20EM_HQ_DKS3 rack speed is calibrated at 180Hz (+/- 3Hz)
• Wait for complete machine initialization
• At the end of machine initialization click on “Heating” button to start the heating of the chemistry.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 6 - p. 

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

3. Preliminary settings

3.1. Flicker setting

Goal of the setting: Adjust the polarisation LCD voltage supply. This setting is done by minimizing
the beat of the specific displayed image on the LCD.
• Go to SU\Settings\Camera
• Check the default value of the Flicker 587
• Select MANUAL, the lens barrel will automatically be positioned on the mirror position and the
flicker pattern will be displayed
• Start with an incorrect low value then increase the value. At one step, the Flicker improves suddenly,
but often the « extreme right or left » part continues to ‘’flicker’’. In such case increase by one more
step to achieve more homogenous flicker over the entire LCD, but which remains low. If you increase
by another step, the flicker becomes very bad again. Between the two positions where the flicker is
low, choose the one, which is the most homogenous.
• Record the validated value on the check list.
• Bad setting -> Horizontal lines every 4 to 6 pixels on the picture or any 24 pixels vertical lines can
be caused by a badly set flicker.

3.2. Auto-heating programming

In the main I/F program auto heating starting time for the week. (Machine should start heating at least
one hour before use.

3.3. Tank checking

3.3.1. Miscellaneous

• Check the mixing motors, all 5 motors should rotate, check by touching the filter supports, they
should vibrate.
•C heck the hydraulic circuit by checking the chemicals poured into the baths according to the
controls operated.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

3.3.2. Level probes checking

• Check all fluid levels are green

• Raise rack carefully few cm – indicator should become orange on the screen
• Raising rack more should change colour to red
• Repeat this for each tank division

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 6 - p. 

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

3.4. Dryer settings

3.4.1. Dryer Feet Settings

Tools: Threadlock Loctide 242

• Adjust the foot towards the front panel in order to achieve horizontal alignment of the drier with
the front panel, as no upper panel is required for calibration, the final adjustment and gluing will be
made at the end of calibration.
• Adjust the rear foot so that the case stands in perfect balance on its 2 feet.
• Check : push downwards on each side of the drier, the foot should not move downwards.
• After fitting the panelling to the machine repeat this check.

3.4.2. Dryer transmission check

• Open the drier and manually turn the cog wheel (insert a photograph for this test, to check the
photograph feed)
• Check the smooth running of the mechanical transmission gears, no binding.

3.4.3. Dryer Driving Pinion Settings

Tools: Screwdriver pozi #1

Make racks run – (SU\Processor\Dryer/Racks\ RACK ON)

• Loosen the screw until the dryer ceases to be driven by the racks.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

• Obtain the drive point by tightening the screw by ¼ turn. If the dryer is not driven, tighten the
screw by a further ¼ turn and so on until the wheel drive threshold is achieved.
• From that point tighten the screw by a further 1 ½ turns.
• Check that the cogwheel does not touch the case when it is fully down.

3.4.4. Dryer temperature

Check correct operation of the heating elements, by checking the outlet from the dryer fan.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 6 - p. 

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

3.5. Chemical setting

3.5.1. Pump Flow Setting

3.5.1.1. Low flow

Prerequisite: shunt pipes going directly into the tank with the tube pliers as described on the fol-
lowing drawing. This should be done for all the pumps. For the REV pump, you can need to shunt two
pipes if the CTO option is present: the one going into the tank and the output pipe dedicate to CTO.
See photo below.

Shunt the pipe supplying the tank

with the tube pliers

SPECIFIC REV PUMP

SHUNTING:
CTO REV input pipe

For each of the flow (low and big) repeat the following operations before measurement:
• Actuate one cycle (20 or 40 turns depending of the flow) with the hydraulic circuit closed (chemical
going straight to the tank).
•A ctuate another cycle after having opened the output of the pipes, chemical should drop into a test
tube, do not make the measurement and put back the chemical into the regenerating tank.

Measurement can now be done:

Nota: Small flow measurement can be made at the same time, big flow also. But DO NOT MAKE
small AND big measurement at the same time.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

Once pump is ready for measurement, use a 250 ml test tube and actuate one cycle (40 turns) on the
pump.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 6 - p. 

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

Supply Tank Ref Test tube 40 turns 1st 40 turns 2nd

measure measure
Developer DEV 250 ml 125 ml +15 ml 125 ml +15 ml
BL/FIX BL 250 ml 125 ml +15 ml 125 ml +15 ml

Stabiliser STAB 250 ml 125 ml +15 ml 125 ml +15 ml

CTO CTO 250 ml 125 ml +15 ml 125 ml +15 ml

To achieve this setting the pump flow can be adjusted using the screw at the right side of the pump.
Move up and down the rotating part to change flow setting (initial setting as shown below for 125ml).

3.5.1.2. Big Flow

Pumps measured SEPARATELY – „pump activation” 20 turns.

Once pump is ready for measurement, use a 250 ml test tube and actuate one cycle (20 turns) on the
pump.

Supply Tank Ref Test tube 20 turns 1st 20 turns 2nd

measure measure
Water H2O 250 ml 204 ml +15 ml 204 ml +15 ml
Water H2O 250 ml 204 ml +15 ml 204 ml +15 ml

Water H2O 250 ml 204 ml +15 ml 204 ml +15 ml

To achieve this setting the pump flow can be adjusted using the screw at the right side of the pump.
Move up and down the rotating part to change flow setting (initial setting as shown below for 204ml).
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 6 - p. 10 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

3.5.2. Temperature offsets setting

Note: temperature measured in first 3 Tank compartment away from heaters– at the opposite side of the rack
pinions, leave probe for 1 minute in the tank.

• Enter SU mode -> settings-> processor-> temperature

• Measure the temperature away from heaters on each 3 heated tank compartments – put the values
to the dialog boxes. Remember or note the values
• Press „Calculate” – Correct value of the offset must be inside the (-1.5; 1.5) margin for each bath.
• Press „Validate” to store the values

Tank section Temperature

Developer 40.0 °C + 0.1°
BL/FIX 38°C + 0.3°

Stabilizer 37°c + 1°

3.5.3. Machine probes verification

Compare the remembered (or noted) values with current machine readings– (chemistry TAB). Maxi-
mum allowed difference between machine reading and thermometer +/- 0,1°C.

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 6 - p. 11

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

4. Densitometer calibration

4.1. X-Rite calibration

Perform densitometer calibration at least once a day. Always leave densitometer connected to mains
to perform measurements.

4.2. Densitometer calibration

• Measure with the X-rite densitometer the chart in three spots spread along the length of the grey
zone and half way across the width of the sheet. Determine the average of the three values ((Measu-
rement 1 + Measurement 2 + Measurement 3) /3) and record the result on the chart under R,V, B.
Acceptable R, G, B values for Grey = 100 +3 pts
Acceptable R, G, B values for White = 8 +2 pts
• Take a reading in the white zone and record the values on the chart.
• Allow the densitometer lamp to warm up for at least 2 minutes before performing the calibration.
To do this access “LLCD stability” and click on “Densitometer lamp”, wait for 2 minutes. :
• Under SU / Settings / Densitometer / Calibration
• Enter the reference values recorded on the calibration photograph for Grey and White in the den-
sity zone on the calibration chart.
• Fully insert the calibration photograph into the dryer inlet, in the direction of the arrows, with the
photograph uppermost, the photograph should be slightly offset to the left (the white zone corres-
ponds to the insertion zone)
• Press on Start just before lowering the drying cover. The densitometer analyses the photograph.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

Wait for the “Validate” caption then retrieve the reference photograph. Carry out a second calibra-
tion to check the correct heating of the lamp.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 6 - p. 12 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

2nd check : Pattern Acq

raw data : Green value
should be above 3000 for
White and above 2100 for
Grey

1st check : Chart Acq raw

data : For each colour :
White –Black > 800

RESULTS :
1st check : Chart Acq Raw Data
For red :ValueR_Maxi – ValueR_mini > 800 (between black and white )
For green :ValueG_Maxi – ValueG_mini > 800 (between black and white)
For blue :ValueB_Maxi – ValeueB_mini > 800 (between black and white)

2nd check : Pattern Acq Raw Data

Min. values on grey for green > 2100
If these values can’t be achieved check the positioning and quality of the fibbers optic.
Too low values can make densitometer readings unstable.

4.2.1. Densitometer verification

Tool: calibration photograph and its envelope.

• Under SU / Settings / Densitometer / Measurement

• Check that the lamp has been lit for more than 2 minutes.
• Insert the calibration photograph as before. Press on start (in “measurement” window).
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

he result is correct if the measured values do not differ by more than 2 points relative to the values
T
for the reference chart. Carry out this measurement 3 times in a row. It is tolerated that one in three
measurements may be outside these tolerances. If the result is not satisfactory, repeat the densitome-
ter calibration (previous stage). A series of three measurements is required, with a maximum of one
incorrect measurement.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 6 - p. 13

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

• At the end do print screen, paste to Paint and save as d:\Rep_dks\spoolin2\Calibration.bmp

Check displayed values

result of calibration
pattern reading

Caution: calibration chart should be packed opposite to front site of envelope – otherwise it can damage
photograph (scratches).

4.2.2. Preliminary polarizer setting

Go to tab SU/settings/camera and set the parameters:

Prerequisite:
• L CD NORM, LED Green, Lens Zero (In the dark room manually adjust, if necessary, the position of
the barrel on the mirror so as to check the displayed photo on the LCD).
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

• Display the PHRtension.png pattern on the LCD.

• Check the displayed image consists of three grey level from black to white with a grey transition
(located in the middle of the pattern and thinner than the two others colours).

Rotate the polarizer in order to keep the colour sequence as above and try to get visually the maxi-
mum picture contrast – Dark and light part of LCD should respectively be as darker and lighter as
possible.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 6 - p. 14 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

5. Mechanical (preliminary) lenses centering

5.1. Lens and LCD offsets adjustment

Goal of the setting: Set the offset value to apply on the lens barrel position to Perform alignment with
the center line of the lens and the centre of the exposure plane.
• GO to tab SU/Settings//OPTICAL/OFFSETS/START

•P ress the buttons: +/- LENS (Y Axis) and +/- LCD (turn angle) move the projected centred line of
the cross to the paper transport axis of the exposure plane.Validate the settings by pressing ‘’OK’’ or
cancel it by pressing second button (‘’RETORE’’).

Lens 2 verification for 17xx version:

Using Camera Tab, display MireCentrage.png on the LCD, position LCD in 0° position, then Lens2.
Light Green LED and verify that the center of the cross is projected in the area formed by two lines
located at -1mm and +1mm from the middle of the sensor. The lateral position of the lens 2 cross is
not to regard as a problem. If not proceed as described in next paragraph.

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 6 - p. 15

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

5.2. Optical plate adjustment

If the cross axial position is out of specification, then the optical adjustment must be reworked accor-
ding to the following information:

•If centring cross is too much on the right of the

exposure plane sensor, then screw X- and unscrew X+.
• If too much on the left, then unscrew X- and screw
X+.
X X Setting should be done with a quarter turn range, after each
- + plate modification, check on the exposure plane the position
of the cross. If necessary, keep adjusting the orientation of the
optical plate

If you have readjusted the optical plate, redo the lens and LCD offsets settings (see paragraph above).
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 6 - p. 16 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

6. Zero adjustment - LCD, Lens

Go to SU/Settings/Zero Captors + LED

Goal of the setting: Adjust the “init” detection in the middle of a motor step to improve LCD and the
lens barrel positioning precision. This setting is being done by physically moving the sensor.

Set Zero on both Lens barrel and LCD barrel.

Prerequisite: IMPORTANT For LCD Zero, position the sensor completely on the left when facing
the machine, and find the first good position starting from this point and going on the right.

Description of the setting:

• Select ‘’START’’, barrel would be placed at the zero position.
• Displayed values should be highlighted in green, if not, Zero sensor need to be adjusted. With the
required Torx key, very slightly move the sensor so as to reach the expected result.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

Repeat this operation for both of LCD and lens barrel.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 6 - p. 17

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

7. Optical setting

7.1. Lens sharpness (Focus)

Goal of the setting: adjust the focus of the lenses.

7.1.1. Machine preparation

1. Place the 5 camera test bench on the exposure deck, to do so the printer module needs to be
opened and the anti static brush to be removed –
2. On the tester PC, launch the channel. Switch application.
3. Under SU/Settings/Camera, select LED green.
4. Under SU/Settings/Camera, display the 255.png chart. (with problems to judge the red colour it
can be changed to mire100.png)

7.1.2. Adjustment - theory

HC lens blocking screw

Vx

V pivot,
should not
be used for
Main ring adjustment

Vy
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 6 - p. 18 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

Each lens is screwed into a socket supported on three height-adjustable screws. These three screws
are used for adjusting the inclination of each lens. A HC head screw is fitted to block the lens on the
socket. This screw is catching the lens on one specific point and should not be unscrewed more than
half a turn otherwise it could get out of its groove.

Below is a simplified top view showing the relative positions of the turret and a lens to be adjusted as
well as the adjustment screws for the lens socket. The 3rd screw acts as a pivot for the socket.

7.1.3. Adjustment - practice

Adjustment of the lens sharpness is performed in two stages:

• Adjustment of the parallelism between a picture plane and the exposure deck via the adjustment
screws X and Y as well as the lens
• Balancing the sharpness of the three picture planes RGB via the lens adjustment

Adjustment Steps
1) Slightly unscrew of half a turn (NOT MORE), the HC flat head screw on the socket
2) Switch to the green LED colour which should be the first adjustment colour.
3) Select the lens which is wanted to be set (1 or 2)

Prerequisite :
Lens 1 setting: LCD position 90°
Camera position 1

Pos 1: Borders camera facing

themselves
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

Pos 2: Borders camera

opposite to each other,
except top Left camera
(expo plan cable)

Lens 2 Setting: LCD position NORM

Camera position 2

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 6 - p. 19

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

Unfocus the lens (screw the main ring, distance LCD – Lens being decreased): all the images should
be fuzzy.
4) unscrew the main ring of the lens till having a first camera sharp. Depending of the image which
first appeared sharp follow the simplified sharpness setting procedure below:

- Screw the lens until the 5 images become fuzzy

- Unscrew until a first image become sharp, note which one it is. Continue unscrewing until the top
left image is sharp
- Depending on which was the first sharp image, action X until one of image on the right become
sharp, and Y until one of image on the bottom becomes sharp.

- Repeat above steps until the 4 corners become sharp at the same time, then parallelism is set up.

5) Switch to Red and Blue, check the sharpness of the pictures.

Find a compromise position for the lens in order to achieve comparable sharpness in the three RGB
picture planes: the green plane pictures slightly sharper, to red average and the blue slightly less sharp.
It is preferable to have a homogenous adjustment on the three colours rather than excessive contrast
(too much difference between the three colours).
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

6) Block the lens - Screw HC flat head screw. After Dossier Acceptation by Quality Dept., mark the
position of the lenses and their sockets by red varnish. Avoid putting varnish in screw socket.
7) REPEAT THE PROCEDURE FOR the other lens, using the appropriate configuration for camera
positions.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 6 - p. 20 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

In case of doubts for the proper focus settings – print test pictures (QUALITY order before that set
the polarizer and LUT according further Instruction chapters) and check the mires with the reference
book. Check sharpness at the middle and corners of the picture, on the control fields. Check also the
dominant colour– very slight magenta or green are. In case of strong colours: GREEN unscrew the
lens VERY slightly (increase distance between lens input and LCD), Magenta – screw the lens VERY
slightly (increase distance between lens input and LCD).

Note: if no clear image appears after unscrewing the lens (from low position to high position), lower the lens
screw by 0.5 mm and repeat adjustment operation.

Adjustment with a single camera: Put the camera in the centre of the exposure plan (just above the
sensor) and adjust focus, only by acting on the focal (vi the main ring). Do not touch any of the micro-
metric screws.

Once focus has been adjusted on the centre, slightly move the camera on the horizontal axis, on the
left of the cell in position one, as described below.
Screw or unscrew Vx so as to get the focus on this point.
Go back to the centre, readjust focus if necessary with the main ring
Then go on the opposite position to the first position where Vx was adjusted
Adjust focus with Vx
Go back to centre, check and readjust focus through the main ring

Repeat this operation: Switching from left to right first position, until the focus is done on both of the
position and the centre.

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 6 - p. 21

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

7.1.4. Validation of setting

To check and validate the sharpness, print the ‘’CONTROL QUALITY’’ order in SU\Control.
Three photos will be printed; one lens 1 LCD 90°, second one lens 1 LCD 0° and the last one lens 2
LCD 0°. For each of the photos there are several checking area, centre and corners area.
The checking area is described below, but the final decision for setting validation can only be done
after comparison to the reference.

Switching of black and white lines

should be clear and visible even
without magnificent glass.

Figures and text should be

clearly readable according
to the reference

At the best sharpness setting no colour can be detected between black lines (magenta or green).
• If the same colour is visible in all of the checking area -> change focus adjustment (screw / unscrew
slightly focus ring and check the result on quality pattern)
• White in the center, magenta on left / right side (and green on the opposite side) -> Screw / uns-
crew Vx. Regarding the result re-adjust focus ring
• White in the center, magenta on top / bottom (and green on the opposite) -> screw / unscrew Vy.
Regarding the result re-adjust focus ring.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 6 - p. 22 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

7.2. Polarizer setting

Goal of the setting: Consist of crossing the best as possible the polarizer.

Unscrew the three plastic white screws
Under SU / Settings / Optical / Polarizer
Select the « Red, Green and Blue » position, then click on « Start »
Wait for the second display of « Difference » and record the value.
Search for maximum contrast in Green (max. difference) by turning the polarizer. Stop the measure

Results:
• The value of the Red must be close to Green value. Blue can be a little bit lower.
• Maximum difference between Blue and Green - 50 points
Expected value range:

Red Green Blue

410 +/- 30 410 +/- 30 410 +/- 30

Sometimes in order to achieve the required contrast, it may be necessary to modify the value of the
Gain on the Driver PCB (see following §)
Each time the gain is adjusted, the polarizer setting must be checked again.
Block the polarizer by slightly screwing blocking screw.

7.3. Gain adjustment

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

Goal of the setting: gain setting physically represents the Amplitude difference (Vmax-Vmin) on the
input of the LCD.
- If set to high, then LCD response amplitude will be squeezed
- If set to low, then LCD response amplitude will be saturated.

1. Select Tab SU / settings / Optical/ Gain LCD

2. Press “START” – wait untill result displays.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 6 - p. 23

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

3. Check the value “difference

4. Modify gain by pressing < or >, to get „difference” value around 800
5. Press «VALIDATE» to store the values.
6. «RESTORE» button give back default settings.

Once gain is set, go back to the previous setting (Polarizer measurement) and check the values are
still correct, if not try to adjust the gain in order to find the good setting.
Those two optical settings are clearly linked.

Expected good
setting: 800

Caution: increasing the gain reduces the grey scale adjustment range.
Tighten the three plastic screws and add a marker line between the black polarizer support and the
frame of the LCD block.

7.4. LED calibration

Goal of the setting: Calibrate the LED to have the required intensity level; intensity measurement is
made with photoreceptor on the photoreceptor at the output of exposure head; intensity value is
transmitted to the LEDMOT PCB by the coaxial cable, level is compared to the theory (expected
one) and a feedback adjusts the input current on the LED.
A. Select Tab SU / settings / Optical/ Calibration LED
B. Press «START» – wait till result display.
C. Check values should be within the following specifications :

Min Nominal Max

Red 820 870 920
Green 650 750 850
Blue 500 550 600
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

D. Validate

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 6 - p. 24 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

7.5. LLCD stability

Goal of the setting: check the measurement stability of the same data being send and displayed on
the LCD. So theoretically measurement should be the same.

• In mode SU, click on SU / Settings / LLCD stability

• S tart by clicking on « Stability » for 2 minutes (about 30 measurements) and observe.

• Stop the stability, repeat the measurement (stability) for 30 measurements, and then switch on the
densitometer lamp (to check that no voltage collapsing occurs).
• Wait for the densitometer lamp cycle to complete.
Result:
No signal per colour should exceed the extreme values +3 / -3,
Measured Values around between around 700 / 1100 / 1200 (depending the colour).
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

• Copy the screen (Alt+ print screen), run paint, paste the picture, save it as d:\Rep_dks\spoolin2\.
Stability.bmp
• Print this picture– Join it to the Quality Dossier. (Check the back printing is correct)

Note: the first measurement which will be made can often be completely out of spec. So the first measurement,
should least ten measurements and should not be considered (stop / restart).

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 6 - p. 25

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

7.6. LCD response

Goal of the setting: Intensity measurement for different grey values being displayed on the LCD, it will
enable adjusting exposure times when linked to a specific paper response.
• Check the darkness of the darkroom.
• GO to mode SU/ Settings/ LCD response - To perform a quick LUT, click on « LLCD Rapid Res-
ponse », which quickly displays the extreme values.
• Click on « Measure » - Check the graphs are decreasing
• Uncheck “Fast LLCD Reponse” and press „Measurement”
The results to obtain are as follows:
• The graphs should decrease from 0 to 4095.

Possible fault: check the adjustment of the input polarizer (at +45°) then adjust the output polarizer.

Check the Values as follows:

Level 0 (Black LCD, White Paper) :
Red : 350 < R0 < 450
Green : 350 < G0 < 450
Blue : 350 < B0 < 450
Level 4095 (White LCD, Black Paper) :
Red : R4095 = - 420  2
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

Green : G4095 < - 300

Blue : B4095 < - 255
Chromatics, level 300 :
Max(R300 or B300 or G300) - Min(R300 or B300 or G300) < 50
Neutral level (positive/negative switching)
Between 1200 and 1600 (this value is indicated in window 1 before validation (Dib Grey) )
A. If the results are correct – Validate the measurements clicking ‘’OK”.
B. Copy the screen (Alt+ printscreen), run paint, paste the picture, save it as d:\Rep_dks\spoolin2\.
LUT.bmp
C. Print this picture– Join it to the Quality Dossier. (Check the back printing is correct)
This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 6 - p. 26 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

7.7. Offsets LED

Goal of the setting: calculate the offset which will be applied mainly on blue LED so as to ensure
exposure times to be high enough on the blue colour. This offset is always applied except for the
exposure plane photoreceptor measurement done in the SU.

• Go to SU\Settings\Offsets LED
• Start
• Wait for results to be displayed
• Validate if values on blue are within the following extrema : [-50 ; 0]

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 6 - p. 27

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

8. Mechanical settings

8.1. Mm / Top

8.1.1. Calibration of Feeder Mm/Top

Goal of the setting: measure the length of paper feeder on the exposure plane and adjust the
number of motors top to feed a specified length.

Go to SU\Settings\Mm/top\MM/TOP FEEDERS:
• Select ‘’Back Right’’ and ‘’Front Right’’: Print 2 of each orders.
A message is displayed when you can bring the photo on the exposure plane.
• Measure the paper length.
• Key the values in the I/F,
• Launch calculation.
• Check calculated values are within the following interval: [0,1570; 0,1585].
If yes validate, if not make another print and another measurement.

8.1.2. Calibration of feeder prepos captors

Goal of the setting: measure the length between paper positioning sensors and the cutter to en-
sure feeding the right paper length for the first photo following cartridge priming. Preliminary condi-
tions: Right cartridge loaded with 6 inches double track paper.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 6 - p. 28 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

Print ‘’Right feeder’’: 2 photos per track come out:

• Paper cutter right back + paper cutter right front on the right (upper) track
• Paper cutter left back + paper cutter left front on the left (lower) track.

a) M
ake the measurement (the line should be covering the whole length of the paper, if not measure
anyway the hole length of the photo).
b) Key values in the I/F.
c) Launch calculation.
d) Check values are within the interval [-21; -19].
e) Validate.

8.1.3. Calibration of MM/Top exposure plane

Goal of the setting: calibrate the number of motors top required to feed the paper to a specified
position after detection by the sensor.

‘’Print pattern’’: 2 photos on the right track will come out (150 and 300mm long).
a) Measure the black line on the left side of both of the photos.
b) Key values in the I/F.
c) Launch calculation.
d) Check values are within the following interval [0,1940; 0,1950].
e) Validate.

If calculated values are not within the defined interval, then print again the photo and make again the
measurements.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 6 - p. 29

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

8.2. Optical centering

Go to SU\Centring\Lens
Goal of the setting: measure LCD 90°, Lens 2 position compared to Lens 1 position. Calculate
exact magnifying ratio for Lens1 & Lens2

Prerequisite: lens 1 must be properly centred and its position should be checked before making
this setting (position of the cross on the exposure plane sensor).

a) Select PRINT PATTERN.

b) Take the photo coming outside the dryer.
c) Make the required measurement on the photo.
d) Key the values in the I/F.
e) Launch Calculation.
f) Press OK.

Caution: no Zero values should be recorded.

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 6 - p. 30 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

8.3. Centering setting

Goal of the setting: calibrate some mechanical parameters for proper positioning of some photos
on the exposure plane.

8.3.1. Parallelism verification

Using DiagDKS, print one train of four photos (6x4 inch)

On the exposure plane, make the following measurements:

1. Gap between front track and back track.

2. Parallelism between front and back photos of both of the wagons.

Parallelism:

Criteria Nominal Min Max

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

1 Dimension 9.5 mm 9 10
A1,A2,B1, B2
2 Abs (A2-B2) < 0.4mm
2 Abs (A2-B1) < 0.4mm

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 6 - p. 31

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

8.3.2. Centering setting

Go to SU/Centring:

1 / Print Right
(paper feeder)
pattern.

3/ Launch
Calculation

2/ Key the values in the I/F

5/ Validation of new 4/ Display of the calculated
values values

• Select Print (1).

• Print the order twice and measure the second one coming out.
• Key values in the I/F (2).
• Launch calculation (3).
• Check the calculated values .
• Validate calculation by clicking ‘’OK’’ (5).

8.3.3. Centering verification

A/ Green borders check

1. Select Tab SU /Controlled, print the control_centering_6inches
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

2. Check the presence of green zones on all formats. Do not consider possible variability of the thic-
kness of green borders
3. Join it to the Quality Dossier. (Check the back printing is correct)

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 6 - p. 32 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

B/ White margins check

1. Print black photos 6x4 inch Split mode with white margins 5mm (Button “WB” in red”) - Double
track – 20 photos
2. Print black photos 6 x 8 inch and 12 x AA inch with white margins 5mm (Button “WB” in red”)– 5
photos of each
3. Measure the width of white borders as the diagram below: compare with the result table.

Format 6 x 4 inch A (B) = 5 +/- 0.5 mm (a-b)/2 < 0.5mm

(c-d)/2 < 0.5mm
Format 6 x 8 inch A (B) = 5 +/- 0.5 mm (a-b)/2 < 0.5mm
(c-d)/2 < 0.5mm
Format 12 x AA inch A (B) = 5 +/- 1 mm (a-b)/2 < 1 mm
(c-d)/2 < 1 mm

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 6 - p. 33

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

9. Quality photo setting

9.1. Paper calibration

• Check that the offsets are all zero,

• Choose the paper to calibrate (Right).
• Press Start, and wait to be able to validate.
• Validate the measurements

Verification:
Note the R,G,B values given by machine. Measure the charts using X-rite Densitometer. Measure
locations as on the drawing below.

Compare the values with the criteria below.

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

Values taken under the « Paper calibration, Sens blocks » tab, the values recorded are those for the
last master photograph printed.
- 3 pts < Value_MacBeth_Red – Value_Densito_Red < 3 pts
- 3 pts < Value_MacBeth_Green – Value_Densito_Green < 3 pts
- 3 pts < Value_MacBeth_Blue – Value_Densito_Blue < 3 pts

The average of the values obtained by X-rite should not differ by more than 3 points relative to the
values returned by the interface. One in five measurements can be tolerated outside this tolerance.
Once criteria is verified, you can validate the paper calibration (click on OK).

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 6 - p. 34 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

9.2. PRNU (Pixel Response Non Uniformity)

Tools:
USB A4 EPSON 4490 scanner (with mate black background)
Magnifying glass
Pixel rule,
Dry Air can
Lens cloth
Multimeter with thermocouple

Scanner first detection:

When you connect the scanner A4 for the first time : launch FlatBedScan. (START/PROGRAMS/AD-
MINISTRATIVE TOOLS), scanner should first be connected after first start-up of the PC (not during
boot).

Goal of the settings : The PRNU corrects LCD / Polarizer faults, but also any chromatic deviations.
Goal of the setting is to have a good uniformity comparing all printed pixels of the LCD.

Preliminary conditions
• The machine chemicals must be up to temperature, in perfect condition, the racks clean, the LED
calibrated, the LCD response and sharpness completed
• Lenses, polarizer, light tube must be clean - clean them if necessary
• The scanner window must be clean and free of dust
• Before any pattern printing dry top rollers of the tank to remove condensation & avoid water tra-
ces on the prints.
• Remove the EPDM dampening roller at the entry of the bleach rack to avoid chemical traces
• Use of wetting agent is compulsory to achieve good PRNU result
• Special care for pattern handling process (taking pattern out of the drying module, cleaning pattern,
cutting pattern to the right dimension for scanning).

Nota:
Be aware that because of the width of the LCD and the high magnificent ratio used, and because this
target needs a A4 flat scanner, the PRNU will be printed into two parts identified as target 1 and
target 2.

Three kind of PRNU should be done during calibration of the DKS3:
For the Lens N°1 : PRNU at 0° and 90° (90° to take into account chromatic deviations due to LCD
rotation)
For the Lens N°2 PRNU Large (Lens 2, LCD 0°)
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

Caution – If machine was switched off for max 5 minutes– Wait obligatory 15 minutes before start
PRNU. If break was longer – Wait untill LCD is up to temperature.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 6 - p. 35

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

9.2.1. LCD temperature

Using a thermocouple measure the temperature of LCD block. The temperature is caught on the
four screw heads used for the fixing of LCD block with the piezo plate: temperature between 36 and
45°C. Note it on the checklist.

9.2.2. PRNU HF (PRNU Lens 1 LCD 0°)

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

First calculation

Take the two parts of the PRNU printed. Check that both of the charts are free from any external
dust, fluff, scratches, and traces of chemicals or rack. Check that there are no particular defects on
the LCD picture (dust, dark zones…), compare with the fault file before continuing.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 6 - p. 36 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

• Blow any dust off the photographs and the scanner, the scanner window must be clean.
• L ay one of the two target (no specific order required) perfectly flat on the scanner window (use
dedicated plastic part to flatten the pattern on the window).
•C aution! Any dust on the window will be considered as an LCD fault and corrected!
• Launch a pre-scan and select a rectangle containing the grey chart.
• Execute the scan, (press ‘’scan target1” or “scan target 2” depending of the pattern which is being
scanned. Make sure you selected the right Id of the target. The picture is automatically generated and
saved under D:\DKS_LOG\PRNU.
• The calculation key becomes accessible :

Check the calculation values:

Size_Pixel = 7 (change if different)
This number corresponds to the size of the square side in the scan file which will be used to calculate
the values of one pixel of the LCD

Number_pixel_referencing = 11
This number corresponds to the neighbouring pixels of the LCD which will be used to detect one
pixel on the scanned printed pattern.
This parameter should not be modified, except if some detection errors occur during calculation. In
this case, this parameter can be increased and changed to 13 value.

• Launch the PRNU calculation.

The software generates a PRNU/R/G/B.BMP file and PRNU/R/G/B _date_time.BMP and renames the
Scan file under the same rule, in order to avoid repeating the calculation with the same file.

Complete process PRNU Calculation

For calculation, do as follows:

Repeat whole procedure (A/)– Change only the required parameters according the table below

Calculation Pixel_Size
1 (this one is already done), 2,3 7

4 ,5,6,7,8,9 11
Last calculation: average (1, see below) on 4 calculations

At any time, check the result doesn’t take into account chemical traces, dust or paper marks, and
scanner traces (…) in the calculation.

Special instructions before calculations at 11:

• Open the picture D:\DKS_LOG\PRNU\ Scan.BMP in Windows Paint.
•O verview the picture, mask all bigger faults (dust, hairs etc) by copying the neighbor part of the
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

picture on the error.

• Save picture.
• Exit Paint.

(1) An additional step must be done to sharpen the PRNU quality and reduce some marks due to
chemistry for example. Average is available at the low side of any PRNU tab and can be done on 2 or
more of the last calculation (Qty to be chosen).

If the result is not acceptable after average, delete PRNU files resulting of the average
and continue scanning as far as needed.
This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 6 - p. 37

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

9.2.3. PRNU HF Results and analysis

• No dust (white dots).

• No density faults (dark zones).
• No traces of chemicals (white marks).
• Uniform grey, uniform density, no mesh chart.
• No important dead pixel can be seen on the uniformity pattern. If not in accordance with quality
reference, it is possible to shoot manually the pixel. See Appendix 4.

IMPORTANT REMARKS
- Dust on PRNU – Print „ORDRE_PRNU_HF_SANS_PRNU” (‘’Control’’ Tab). If on the picture
white and „fluid” spots are visible – Clean precisely Expo head lens, polarizer and machine lenses.
- Chemistry traces – in order to detect if traces of chemistry have been scanned, print a PRNU order
by manually rotating the exposure head by 45° (approximatively). If the chemistry traces remain when
submitted to a 45° rotation, it means they are scanned. If they maintain their position, it means they
are not scanned. Clean the racks. In the case of a machine in post calibration stage (control, burn in),
it is not necessary to repeat the operation. This technique can also be used to highlight the presence
of a defect in the light tube or inside the block (if the visible defect rotates, it means that it is linked
to the block or to the light tube). Clean the racks with soaped brush, either wipe rolls with clean or
isopropyl alcohol.
- Impossible to make PRNU calculation on 1st step (picture too light), or huge calculation mistakes
on some corners (big chromatic deviation) – modify the file C:\dKS\CONSTANTES\ORDRES\OR-
DRE_PRNU\PRNU.XML. Find Variable OFFSET SENSIBILITY(0,0,0) – change values from zero to
higher ones (% of the brightness - max 30). Immediately after printing PRNU, remake the file to it’s
previous State. Ask technical support or qualified calibrator for help!

9.2.4. PRNU 90 (Lens 1, 90°)

This PRNU 90° setting must be made after having set the PRNU HF properly.
This PRNU takes into account rotation of LCD from 0° to 90°: Some density and chromatic differen-
ces will appear with rotation of the LCD. The goal of is PRNU is to compensate those artefacts due
to this rotation.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 6 - p. 38 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

For calculation, do as follows:

Calculation Pixel_Size Numberpixel_referencing

1,2,3,4,5,6,7 11 13

Last calculation: average (1, see below) on 4 calculations

If the result is not acceptable after average, delete PRNU files resulting of the average
and continue scanning as far as needed.

9.2.5. PRNU large (Lens 2, 0°)

(N/A for 16XX series)

This PRNU will take into account the use of lens 2 instead of lens 1. LCD still keeps 0° position.
Some density and chromatic differences will appear with changing of lens. The goal of this PRNU is to
compensate specific artefacts appearing with using lens 2. 4 scans should be enough to reach a good
result.

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 6 - p. 39

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

This PRNU Large setting must be made after having set the PRNU HF properly and sharpness appro-
ved

For calculation, do as follows

Calculation Pixel_Size Numberpixel_referencing

1,2,3,4,5,6,7 13 13

Last calculation: average (1, see below) on 4 calculations

If the result is not acceptable after average, delete PRNU files resulting of the average and continue
scanning as far as needed.

9.3. Piezo calibration

This adjustment is made using the same principle as for the PRNU, analysis of a scanner picture; the
purpose is to make all the dots equidistant from one to another. Piezo system allows to multiply by 9
or 16 the quantity of pixels available on the LCD (pixel number on the picture printed = pixels of the
LCD x 9 or pixels on the LCD x 16).
Multiplication is done by moving LCD with small piezo movements directed along x or y axis; length
of the movements is distance between two pixels of the LCD divided by 3 (X9) or divided by 4 (X16).

9.3.1. Piezo X16 machine 17xx

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

Sub-Positions of the X16 piezo for each pixel

• Select Tab SU/Piezo X16.
•P ress „Print pattern”, print one photo. Do not touch the machine during the printing sequence, in
order to avoid any vibration!!!
• Position the chart on the scanner, such that UP is located at the top of the picture resulting from
the scan – blow any dust off the picture and scanner window.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 6 - p. 40 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

• Launch a pre-scan and select a rectangle containing all the dots in the centre of the chart, without
overlapping the grey zone.

• E xecute the scan - The picture is automatically generated and saved under D:\DKS_LOG\Piezo.
•C heck the presence of all the dots and the absence of grey. Result - 3 separated reference dark dots
in the top and bottom left hand corners and the top right hand corner only.

The calculation key becomes accessible - Launch the piezo calculation.

Piezo calculation

Calculated values
for new voltages X4

Calculated values for

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

new voltages X16

Calculated values for

new voltages X9

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 6 - p. 41

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

Possible faults :
• Piezo wiring crossed between X Y, inconsistent displacement of the piezo.
• If the voltage values in X (or Y) are too high, the displacement along X (or Y) is hindered by debris
in the slots, incorrect slots, the locknut in the slots or an incorrect piezo attachment ….
• If the two diagrams are not identical, the system has generated a slight rotation, for the possible
faults, see above.
• The bare plate (without piezo, or spring) should be deformable effortlessly by hand along X and Y, if
not, for possible faults, see above.
• If the calculated values are > 135 V, the piezo board returns a voltage of 10 V eff.

From Piezo X16 tab, piezo voltage is calculated for both X16 and X9
- For machine 17XX use tab Piezo X16 for X16 and X9 calculation
- For machine 16XX use tab Piezo X9 for X9 calculation (see next paragraph)

Piezo calculation is acceptable when

- Five consecutive prints give a good result (no visible horizontal or vertical line).
- From “Image Manager / Setting” print “Mire100” (Qty 20) with a centred single track cartridge (loa-
ded with 152 paper) and control piezo quality on this 99 grey printouts.

When first print is not acceptable, redo piezo calculation (follow calculation process)
When one of the following prints is not acceptable, check vibrations. Piezo X9

9.3.2. Piezo X9 machine 16xx

The setting is the same than for Piezo X16 (see paragraph 9.3.1 above) with the tab “PIEZO X9”.

9.4. Chromatic aberration lens 2

Preliminary conditions:
• flicker adjusted
• LCD response
• 12” wide paper calibrated
• Orientation and sharpness of the lens 2 approved
• PRNU and Piezo X16 adjusted
Tools:
Scanner A4 2400 dpi well cleaned (no dust, no finger traces …) inside and outside the glass.
Goal of the setting:
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

The correction of chromatic aberration allows to improve the lens sharpness, and to make neutral
contours of an image (e.g. Bordure text, eyebrow…) by removing a small magenta/green or cyan/yel-
low phantom image.You will find below the scan of a print before correction and after correction.
The phenomenon of aberration comes from the index of refraction of the optical system which va-
ries according to the wavelength and thus according to the colours red, green and blue: as a result we
have a light shift from the various plans of exposures RVB. The correction of aberration is carried out
by reframing each colour plan. The aberration is more visible in periphery of lenses, invisible pheno-
menon on a uniform area (not linked with the PRNU), and almost negligible on the small Lens 1. The
parameters of aberrations vary slightly with the rotation of the LCD.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 6 - p. 42 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

Instructions:

Area to be scanned in the

grey square

• Click on “PRINT Pattern”.

Note: STOP/GO must be green to print the pattern. Wait the exit of the test card pattern corresponding to
the lens and LCD orientation.Visually check sharpness on the 4 corners of the image: each pixel of the pattern
(Magenta, cyan and yellow) must be sufficiently contrasted.
• Choose a pattern exempts of defects linked to the printer (dust on the exposure system, chemical
traces, dirtiness recovered from the racks…).
• Scan the 4 elements (TARGET 1 to TARGET_4) of the pattern:
- Position the pattern on the glass in order to scan Target 1 and Target 4.
Do not cut the print, as we use to do for PRNU.
Orientation of the print is important: Up oriented at the scanner rear side (close to the hinge), down
oriented on the front of the scanner (buttons side).
The patterns Target1 and Target 4 should be fitted in the middle of the scanner (The scanner is more
uniform in its center).
The top side of the print (line going through Target 1 and Target 2) should be fitted against the top
guide of the scanner (line going through the two hinges) to accurately measure the displacements
linked to the chromatic aberrations.
Click on button PRESCAN, wait a few moments the image of Prescan.
Select the useful area of Target 1 see photo above
Scan Target 1.
Do not scan the Grey frame, and scan the biggest possible white area.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

Select the useful area of Target 4 in the same way, and click Scan Target 4.
- Position the pattern on the glass in order to scan Target 2 and Target 3.
Repeat the same process than above
- Wait the end of the scan. Automatically the scanned image will be recorded under D:\LOG_DKS\
Aberration with the names:
SCAN_Aberration_1.bmp
SCAN_Aberration_2.bmp
SCAN_Aberration_3.bmp
SCAN_Aberration_4.bmp

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 6 - p. 43

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

• Click on “CALCULATION” to launch calculation.

When calculation has been done, the new parameters of aberration are immediately taken into
account. The calculation result is recorded automatically in C:\DKS\parametres\optique.ini under the
fields K and O in the section of lens used.

Note: the old parameters of aberration are back-up in optique.ini.

Note: the system of calculation of the parameter of aberration does not need convergence on several calculations:
Only one is enough. The system always establishes its new parameters starting from a test card printed with
aberration parameters “OFF”.
• Check the result:
K is the aberration rate. If K is null, the chromatic aberration is not corrected.
O is the centre of the chromatic aberration in the exposure plan. O is usually in the centre and then
closes to 0.
The K and O of green are always 0.
Kx and Ky: similar and close to -0.001.
Ox and Oy: usually < 400.
• Click on Monitoring:
The machine sends two photos: one with corrected aberration and a second without

Note: button “CANCEL”: Allows getting back the previous parameters made before the last calculation.

Note: button “RESTAURE”: Allows re-initialise to 0 the chromatic aberration parameters.With parameters set
to 0, the chromatic aberration phenomenon is no longer corrected.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 6 - p. 44 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

10. Quality Photo Validation

This step allows validating the proper uniformity of the PRNU and correction of chromatic deviation.
To do so, print the ‘’CONTROL QUALITY’’ order located under SU\Control.

For each of the photos achieve a densitometry measurement on the five checking area and record
the R, G; B values on the pictures.

Zone B
Zone A Py
Px
Densitometry measurement

R, G, B values should be recorded at the

expected location.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

In front of the Two , calculate

and record the result of (resp):

Red – Green

Green - Blue

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 6 - p. 45

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

10.1. Sharpness and quality photo results

Criteria
Zone A black lines should be distinguishable
no dominant colour : the background should be
white
Zone B black lines should be distinguishable on a white
background
the printing should not run
Px Image of PiezoX setting. Lines must be regular &
equidistant from each other
Py Image of PiezoY setting. Lines must be regular &
equidistant from each other
:
If sharpness is not acceptable, unscrew blocking screw of the lens, note original position of the lens,
change position of the focus ring to the left (about 1cm) and print 8 patterns changing position
between each pattern up to 1 cm at the right. Compare result on the printouts and choose the best
position for the lens.

If dominant colour can be detected in one of the corner, redo plate adjustment using 5 cameras
bench (refer to §7.1).

10.1.1. Chromatic and Neutrality Results

Neutrality: Print ORDRE_LENS_SENSIBILITY_OFFSET and measure grey values in the grey centred
checking area. For any of the 3 prints, values for R, G, B must be 97 +/-5

If the criteria for LENS1 LCD 0 (Ref) is not satisfied, repeat the paper calibration and re-print the
charts.
If criteria for « LCD90° » position and / or LENS2 is not OK offsets can be calculated:

•R
eport center RGB values for LCD90° & Lens 2 on the LENS1 LCD0° (ref) pattern.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 6 - p. 46 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

• Do calculation as described on the photo (Ref values = R, G, B values for Grey in the centre of Ref
pattern).
• Open « C:\DKS\PARAMETERS\OPTICAL.INI » file.

Caution:
- lens 1 corresponds to the lens «pos_barillet = 1 » in « optique.ini » file.
- lens 2 corresponds to the lens «pos_barillet = 2 » in « optique.ini » file.

Offset for Lens2:

[OBJECTIF_0]
POS_BARILLET=2
PRESENT=1
POS_THEORIQUE=959
RAPPORT_AGRANDISSEMENT=19.480000
CENTRAGE_X=2.900000
CENTRAGE_Y=-0.300000
OFFSET_SENSIBILITY_R= XXX Key in value found for (1)
OFFSET_SENSIBILITY_G= XXX Key in value found for (2)
OFFSET_SENSIBILITY_B= XXX Key in value found for (3)
LARGEUR_MIN_PAPIER=89
FORCAGE_LCD_0=1
OFFSET_SENSIBILITY_90_R=0
OFFSET_SENSIBILITY_90_G=0
OFFSET_SENSIBILITY_90_B=0

Offset for Lens1 LCD90:

[OBJECTIF_2]
POS_BARILLET=1
PRESENT=1
POS_THEORIQUE=3481
RAPPORT_AGRANDISSEMENT=15.020000
CENTRAGE_X=0.000000
CENTRAGE_Y=0.000000
OFFSET_SENSIBILITY_90_R= XXX Key in value found for (4)
OFFSET_SENSIBILITY_90_G= XXX Key in value found for (5)
OFFSET_SENSIBILITY_90_B= XXX Key in value found for (6)
LARGEUR_MIN_PAPIER=89
OFFSET_SENSIBILITY_R=0
OFFSET_SENSIBILITY_G=0
OFFSET_SENSIBILITY_B=0
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

!!! In LENS1 section never modify OFFSET_SENSIBILITY_R=0, OFFSET_SENSIBILITY_G=0, OFF-

SET_SENSIBILITY_B=0 !!!

Once modification in the file is OK, save & close Optique.ini file, quit / restart DKS application and
print ORDRE_LENS_SENSIBILITY_OFFSET. Make sure the grey values are within acceptance refe-
rences.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 6 - p. 47

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

10.1.1.1. Density Deviation on Green

Establish the difference between the green in each corner and in the centre, record the maximum
value in absolute terms, and record the value on the test charts.

Acceptance criteria:
Lens n°2 : G>19 < 12
Lens n°1 : G>15 < 6

If the density is too high, it will be necessary to repeat the PRNU calculation to lower it.

10.1.1.2. Chromatics

In the 4 corners for Lens1 LCD0 and Lens2 LCD0, do Red - Green and Green – Blue calculation.

Red - Green
Green - Blue

Perform the following calculations (find max and min values in the corner)
CRV=|Max ( Red – Green) – Min ( Red – Green)|
CVB=|Max ( Green – Blue ) – Min ( Green – Blue )|
- Record the values on the test charts.
- Acceptance criteria:
Lens n°2: G>19 CRV < 8
CVB < 8
Lens n°1: G>15 CRV < 5
CVB < 5

10.2. Backprint
On the previously done printouts check the quality of back printing. Adjust anvils when necessary,
using control strip 0,4mm. Block the adjustment screws with red locking varnish.
Photos added to calibration file should have a good back printing quality level, compare to references
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

for check.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 6 - p. 48 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

10.3. Machine Productivity Check

Goal of the setting: confirm machine is printing within the rate within the specification.
Pre requisite: machine loaded with double track cartridge, good calibration paper.

1. Go to SU\Settings\Controlled
2. Select productivity
3. Machine will print 30 photos on each track
4. Check the counting result displayed in the I/F is OK according to the spec : 2000 photos/h +/- 100.
5. Record the value in the check list.

10.4. Lastest Check

• Print 40 grey photos 6”x4” mode split with white borders (5mm).
• Don’t mix the back and front tracks.
• Check the dimension of the white borders (see paragraph 8.3.3 for specifications).
•O n both track, check the stability of the length: observe the pile of photograph which the variation
max is lower than 0.3 mm.
• Print the “feeder prepos captor”.
•C heck the length of the four photos: the maximum difference must be lower than 0.5mm.

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 6 - p. 49

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

11. Delivery of the machine to Quality Dpt

11.1. Film scanner connection

N/A for DKS3 calibration. For specific use refer to Appendix 8.

11.2. Constitution of the calibration file

As part of the delivery of the machine to the quality department, the machine should have its calibra-
tion file constituted with the calibration check list, and the following photos:

The italic lines define the added photos for 17xx series

Uniformity
• Uniformity order lens1 LCD 0° (blue and grey photos)
• Uniformity order lens1 LCD 90° (blue and grey photos)
• Uniformity order lens2 LCD 0° (blue and grey photos)
• The two target patterns print at the beginning the PRNU HF

Sharpness
• Quality photos with the quality approval (2 or 3 photos)

Uniformity and centre neutrality

• 2 Quality_DKS3_X9 _G15 photos (one with density and chromatic calculations)
• 2 Quality_DKS3_X9 _G15_ LCD 90° photos (onewith density and chromatic calculations)
• 2 Quality_DKS3_X16 _G19 photos (one with density and chromatic calculations)

Piezo
• 5 piezo patterns X9
• 5 piezo patterns X16

Chromatic abberations
• Two checking photos

Centering
• 10 152x102 White borders photos printed at the end of the calibration step
• Target lens pattern
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

• Control_centering_6 inches (18 photos)

• 2 photos of the MM/TOP exposure plane order
• 2 photos of the MM/TOP feeder order
• 4 photos of the paper cutter & phd2 order

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 6 - p. 50 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

Screen copy
• Densitometer calibration
• LLCD stability
• LUT LCD
• Burn-in 1 (given by the start-up team)
• Piezo test (given by the start-up team)

Other
• 5 300x457 black photos (used for scratches)
• 20 300x127 black photos (used for the tank orientation checking)

All the photos should be checked one after one and they should correspond to the expected quality
level. When the file is considered as correct, the machine must be prepared for the functional control.

11.3. Backup of machine parameters

Make the machine parameters backup according to the specified procedure.

11.4. Preparation of the machine for the quality department

Go through all the following steps:

• Open C:\DKS\Parametres\PRNU_date_year…, delete all the renamed PRNU files which are not
used anymore.
• Delete all the old SCAN files under D:\
• Delete all the cartridges which were used for paper size testing, and which will not stay attached
to the machines for functional control. To do so, go to SU, pwd : DKS 3, Select Templates\Cartridges\
then delete all the cartridges which needs to be deleted.
• Clean the lenses.
• Check that exposure head is properly tightened.
• Assembly the following machines panel:
- Upper Panel
- Electrical box Back panel
- Back panel
- Cartridge door panel: Correct cartridge locking and unlocking should be checked afterwards.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Settings

Remark: check on those panels and on the other of the machine that no scratches or visual defects are
visible.

•C heck and adjust if necessary the position of the dryer feet. When OK, Apply a drop of weak thread
lock (Loctite 242) to the threaded portion of each of the feet.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 6 - p. 51

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Electrical Diagrams

Chapter 7 - Electrical Diagrams

1. Complete Low Tension Diagram��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������3

2. Complete 220V Diagram���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������4

3. 230V Diagram�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������5

4. Low Voltage Chem. Processor Diagram��������������������������������������������������������������������������6

5. Paper Transport Diagram���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������7

6. Paper Feeder Diagram��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������8

7. Leds Exposure Head Diagram������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������9

8. PCBA-Harness Synoptic�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 10

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Electrical Diagrams

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 7 - p. 

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Electrical Diagrams Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Electrical Diagrams

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 7 - p.  060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Electrical Diagrams

1. Complete Low Tension Diagram

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Electrical Diagrams

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 7 - p. 

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Electrical Diagrams

2. Complete 220V Diagram

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Electrical Diagrams

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 7 - p.  060 311 714 B 12/2007

3. 230V Diagram
4. Low
Voltage
Chem.
Processor
Diagram
5. Paper Transport
Diagram
6. Paper Feeder Diagram
7. Leds Exposure
Head Diagram
8. PCBA-Harness
Synoptic
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

Chapter 8 - Software Installation

Procedure

1. Preparation����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 3

2. XP Ghost�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 3
1.1. Required tools����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������3
1.2. Pre-requisites������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������3
1.3 Logins and passwords����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������3
Loading XP 2.6.8 Ghost�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������4

3. Installation of version 4.4.x LX������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 4

3.1 Step 1: Installation of the DKS Software �����������������������������������������������������������������������������5
3.2. Step 2: Installation of the KIAS software������������������������������������������������������������������������������8
3.3. Step 3: Installation of the Preferred Color Rendering�������������������������������������������������������8
3.4. Step 4: Installation of the Calendars����������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 10
3.5. Step 5: Installation of Creative Frame (Calendars Editor)��������������������������������������������� 13
3.6. Installation of the DKS Network Manager (only if part of the customer installation)��14
3.7. Installation of the KIAS shortcuts (only if KIAS software installed)�������������������������������������16
3.8. Other installations: Letter Configurator and Scanners�������������������������������������������������� 16 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

4. Launching Version 4������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������22

5. Changing the language�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������22

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 8 - p. 

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 8 - p.  060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

1. Preparation
1.1. Required tools

• DVD including Master OS XP DKS3 2.6.8 minimum

• DVD of version 4.4x LX DKS3
• Dongle related to the machine (1610, 1670, 1710, 1750, 1770)

1.2. Pre-requisites

• Log on in Administrator mode, close all applications and backup the Parameters, IM1500
Pro and Variables files using the savedks.exe software present under the C/DKS directory. Only
the 3 folders (Parameters, Im1500 and Variables) necessary for the installation are copied.
• Connect the hardware dongle to the rear of the computer.
• Disconnect the network cable.
• Disconnect the external densitometer.

1.3 Logins and passwords

DKS 1610, 1670, 1710, 1750, 1770 :

Log on : administrator Password : DKSLF
Log on : dks Password :

SU operator mode Password : user

SU Technician mode Password : dks 3

Configurator : administrator Password : service

Configurator : operator Password :

2. XP Ghost
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

It is mandatory to backup the DKS3 parameters before ghosting. Make it on a USB key using
'Windows Explorer' or burn it on a CD using the 'savedks.exe' program (located in C:\DKS).
A backup is made of three directories (including recursive subdirectories):

• C:\DKS\parametres
• C:\DKS\variables
• C:\DKS\im1500

If the machine is equipped with the USB external densitometer, unplug it before launching the ghost. Before
replugging the densitometer, make sure the software DVD has been inserted as described in the '3.8.4. Drivers
for the external densitometer' paragraph of this chapter.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 8 - p. 

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

Loading XP 2.6.8 Ghost

Installation on a Ghost 2.6.8 (partition C:\ size = 6 Go) : Master OS System C:\Partition only

• Insert the Master OS XP DKS3 2.6.8 DVD and restart the computer
• Select 3 : Load Master OS XP DKS 2.6.8
• Select 1 : Load Master OS XP DKS 2.6.8 with automatic PC detection
• Select 2 : Load Master OS System C:\Partition only or Full Ghost

The installation of the full Ghost will erase all data on partitions C and D (depending on selection)!!
• Proceed with partition load. Destination drive will be permanently overwritten.
ClickYes.
• Proceed with disk verify ? Select Yes
• If 0 difference, Select OK
• Remove the CD from the CD-ROM drive and restart the computer
• The system will restart once and the following message is displayed:
Congratulations. Ghost OS XP 2.6.8 Date installed.
• Click OK

3. Installation of version 4.4.x LX

CAUTION! This consists in either a complete software installation or a simple software upgrade.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

• Complete software installation (ghost + software installation):

- Restore the backup under C:\DKS only if the machine has just been ghosted (by pasting
the three following folders 'parametres', 'variables' and 'im1500' into the existing C:\DKS
directory).
• Software upgrade (software installation only): backup not required.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 8 - p.  060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

3.1 Step 1: Installation of the DKS Software

This version must be installed on the machine, not on a disconnected PC (since the install program will
automatically upload the firmwares: see the '3.2 Step 2: Updating firmwares manually' paragraph of this
chapter).
• Log on in Administrator mode.
The restore backup step should be done before installing the software in case you've ghosted the machine.
• Insert the DVD of Version 4.4x
• In the Soft folder, double-click on: Setup.exe

• Click Next when the following window appears:

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 8 - p. 

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

• Click Yes to accept the

license agreement:

• Click Next when the following window appears:

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 8 - p.  060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

• If the installer detects an existing software, it will first generate a backup under D:\Backup,
and only then start installing the new version.
• If the following message is displayed the paper responses used are not valid and are liable
to block the application. Consequently, the standard paper response is installed by default.

• Old paper responses may be retrieved in the backup folder. The old paper.ini file is saved
under C:\DKS\Paramètres\papier.ini.backup. For more information, refer to the fol-
lowing file : C\ :Dks\Logs\DKSUpdatePaperResponse.log

• The installation program will automatically upload the firmwares in the 3 CAN boards of
the machine (paper feeder, paper transport and tank).
• When the system prompts to restart, click ‘Yes, I want to restart my computer now’,
leave the DVD in the reader, and click 'Finish'.
• The system restarts and logs on automatically in Administrator mode (password: DKSLF).
If the installation is successful, the following message is displayed:

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 8 - p. 

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

3.2. Step 2: Installation of the KIAS software

• Logon in Administrator mode.

• Insert the DVD of version 4.4.x.
• In Components\KIAS software, double-click on KIAS.exe.

• Click Yes if Java and the KIAS software are not yet installed.
• The installation is automatic and the computer restarts automatically.
• When restarting, a message informs the operator that the installation is successful. Click
OK.

3.3. Step 3: Installation of the Preferred Color Rendering

• Logon in Administrator mode

• Insert the DVD containing the software version
• In Components\ColorPreferedRendering, double-click on ColorPreferedRen-
dering_V42xLX.exe. Click Next :
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 8 - p.  060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

• Click I Agree to accept the Licence agreement in the window that displays:

• Select the components to be installed and click Install:

• Click Finish:
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 8 - p. 

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

3.4. Step 4: Installation of the Calendars

3.4.1. Installation of French calendars

• Logon in Administrator mode

• Insert the DVD containing the software version
• In Components\Calendars2006\Francais, double-click on PATCH_KIS_Calendars_
2006_FR.exe
• Click Next :

• Click I agree to accept the license agreement.

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 8 - p. 10 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

• Select French 2006 and click Install.

• Click Finish in the window that displays.

3.4.2. Installation of English calendars

• Logon in Administrator mode

• Insert the DVD containing the software version
• In Components\Calendars2006\English, double-click on PATCH_KIS_Calendars_
2006_UK.exe.
• Click Next:

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 8 - p. 11

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

• Click I Agree to accept the Licence agreement.

• Select English 2006 an click Install:

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

• Click Finish in the window that displays.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 8 - p. 12 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

3.5. Step 5: Installation of Creative Frame (Calendars Editor)

• Logon in Administrator mode

• Uninstall Creative Frame if is already installed on the machine by clicking on Start\Pro-
grams\CreativeFrame x.x\Uninstall Creative Frame
• Insert the DVD of the software version
• In Components\Creative Frame, double-click on CreativeFrame_Setup_1.2.exe.
• Select the installation language and click OK:

• Click Next when the following window appears:

• Click Install when the following window appears:

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 8 - p. 13

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

• Click Yes if you want to install the Creative Frame application on a DKS or a WorkStation.
• Click No if you want to install the Creative Frame application on a PC.

• Uncheck Run Creative Frame and click Finish.

3.6. Installation of the DKS Network Manager (only if part of the customer installation)

• Logon in Administrator mode

• Insert the DVD containing the software version
• In Components\DKS NETWORK MANAGER, double-click on Setup.exe
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

• Click Next when the following window appears:

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 8 - p. 14 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

• Click Next when the following window appears:

• Check Activate DKS Network Manager, select the destination machine (DKS or
Workstation), then click on Next:

• Click Finish when the following window appears: Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 8 - p. 15

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

3.7. Installation of the KIAS shortcuts (only if KIAS software installed)

• Click on Install_KIAS_Previewer.bat under Components\KIAS PreviewShortcut In-

staller.

3.8. Other installations: Letter Configurator and Scanners

3.8.1. Letter Configurator

Note: the memory card reader must be connected.

• Logon in Administrator mode.

• Launch the letter configurator from the desktop.
• Click OK when the following window appears.

• A message appears that confirms that the letter Configurator has been succesfully in-
stalled. Click OK.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

3.8.2. FlatBedScan

• Logon in Administrator mode

• Launch Flatbedscan from the desktop
• A message is displayed. Click Yes.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 8 - p. 16 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

3.8.3. Drivers for ELO Touch screens (optional)

Note: if you are using a touch screen, make sure that the corresponding driver is installed(presence of an
ILO icon in the tray icon bar). If not, install the drivers from the software DVD (\tools\drivers\elotouch screen\
elotouchscreeninstaller.exe).

Note: to install the ELO touch drivers, the external densitometer should be disconnected.

• Launch the patch by double-clicking on it. The following screen appears:

• Click on 'Yes', and do not toch anything until the installation is not complete. All following
screens will appear one by one.

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 8 - p. 17

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

• When you come back to the desktop, open the Control panel (menu Start > Control
Panel), and double-click on ELOTouchScreen. The following screen appears:

1. Click on 'Align'.

2. Then click on the

different targets from
position of normal use.

• Validate by clicking on 'OK'.

• Log off and logon again in DKS mode.
• Check that the touchscreen works well on a DKS application.

3.8.4. Drivers for the external densitometer

Important: it is highly important to scrupulously respect the following porcedure when installing the drivers
for the external densitometer.

• Logon in administrator mode.

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

• Insert the DVD of version 4.4.x LX

DKS3.
• Plug the densitometer into its USB
port.
• The opposite window appears. Do not
change the default selected option and
click on 'Next':

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 8 - p. 18 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

• A window appears that prompts you to wait.

• When the following window appears, do not change the selection and click on Next:

• A window appears that prompts you to wait.

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 8 - p. 19

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

• Click on Finish in the window that appears.

• The following window appears. Do not change the selected default option, and click on
Next.

• A window appears that prompts you to wait.

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 8 - p. 20 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

• When the following window appears, do not change the selection and click on Next.

• A window appears that prompts you to wait.

• Click on Finish in the window that appears.

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 8 - p. 21

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

4. Launching Version 4
• Logon in DKS mode.
• The number of the version 4.4.x LX should be displayed on the loading screen of the ver-
sion.
• If 'Version unknown' is displayed, check the connection and the type of the dongle.

5. Changing the language

• Logon in administrator mode.
• On the desktop, double-click on the Language option icon.
• Select the appropriate menu from the drop-down menu of the Regional option tab.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 8 - p. 22 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

• Move on to the Advanced tab and select the appropriate language in the drop-down
menu, and click on OK.

• When the following message appears, click on Yes.

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

• A new message appears, click on Yes.

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 8 - p. 23

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

• Select the appropriate language from the drop-down of the Regional options tab, and click
on OK.

• When the software starts loading, click on the flag of the top right hand corner of the
lauching window.
• Click on the flag of the appropriate language.
• The application will complete opening in the new language selected.
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

Chapter 8 - p. 24 060 311 714 B 12/2007

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

Service Manual - DKS Generation 3 - Software Installation Procedure

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007 Chapter 8 - p. 25

 Service Manual - DKS Generation 3

This document is not binding.The manufacturer reser-

ves the right to modify his machines and this manual
without prior notice.

Document non contractuel. Le constructeur se ré-

serve le droit de modifier ses machines et le présent
document
sans préavis.

Service Manual DKS Generation 3

Manuel Technique DKS Generation 3

Ref. 060 311 714 B

©Kis 12.2007
Service Manual - DKS Generation 3

This document is confidential. It remains the property of KIS. It may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties.

060 311 714 B 12/2007